C-ClassOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 0768 13 Part no. 204 584 73 82 Edition A 2013

É2045847382+ËÍ2045847382

C-Clas

sOperat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwisereproduced, in whole or in part, without thewritten permission of Daimler AG.

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofPrince.RiPod® and iTunes® are registeredtrademarks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark ofHarman International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® areregistered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark ofiBiquity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands areregistered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.

In this Operator's Manual, you will find thefollowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes draw your attention to hazardsthat endanger your health or life, or the healthor life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally aware actionsor disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates aninstruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols insuccession indicate an instructionwith several steps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find more information about atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

DisplayDisplay This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMANDdisplay.

Parts of the software in the vehicle areprotected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 28.11.2011

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzBefore you first drive off, read this Operator'sManual carefully and familiarize yourself withyour vehicle. For your own safety and a longervehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this manual. Disregardingthem may lead to damage to the vehicle orpersonal injury.Vehicle damage resulting from the disregardof the instructions is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or model designation of yourvehicle may differ according to:RmodelRorderRcountry variantRavailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresTherefore, descriptions may vary from thoseof your own vehicle.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

2045847382 É2045847382+ËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 21

At a glance ........................................... 27

Safety ................................................... 37

Opening/closing ................................. 73

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 93

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 109

Climate control ................................. 125

Driving and parking .......................... 139

On-board computer and displays .... 199

Stowage and features ...................... 259

Maintenance and care ...................... 285

Breakdown assistance ..................... 299

Wheels and tires ............................... 317

Technical data ................................... 349

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...115 V socket ...................................... 26912 V socket

see Sockets4ETS

see ETS/4ETS (ElectronicTraction System)

4MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 1814MATIC off-road system ................... 181

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 219Function/notes ................................ 62Important safety notes .................... 62Warning lamp ................................. 247

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 130Active Blind Spot Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 210Display message ............................ 234Function/information .................... 193

Active Driving Assistance package . 193Active Lane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 210Display message ............................ 233Function/information .................... 196

Active light function ......................... 114Active Service System

see ASSYST PLUSADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 67Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 229Function/notes ............................. 114Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 212

Additives (engine oil) ........................ 356Air bags

Display message ............................ 225Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 42Important safety notes .................... 41Knee bag .......................................... 43

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 45Pelvis air bag ................................... 44Safety guidelines ............................. 40Side impact air bag .......................... 43Window curtain air bag .................... 45

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air ventsGlove box ....................................... 136Important safety notes .................. 135Rear ............................................... 137Setting ........................................... 135Setting the center air vents ........... 136Setting the side air vents ............... 136

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 215Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-theft alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 268Assistance menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 209ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 286Hiding a service message .............. 286Notes ............................................. 286Resetting the service intervaldisplay ........................................... 286Service message ............................ 286Special service requirements ......... 287

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 70Function ........................................... 70Switching off the alarm .................... 70

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 210Display message ............................ 232Function/notes ............................. 188

Audio menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 206Audio system

see separate operating instructionsAuthorized Centers

see Qualified specialist workshop

4 Index

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

Authorized workshopssee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 229see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 146Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 145Automatic headlamp mode .............. 111Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program ............... 151Changing gear ............................... 150Display message ............................ 241Driving tips .................................... 150Emergency running mode .............. 155Kickdown ....................................... 150Manual drive program .................... 153Problem (malfunction) ................... 155Program selector button ................ 150Pulling away ................................... 143Releasing the parking lockmanually ........................................ 155Selector lever ................................ 148Shift ranges ................................... 152Starting the engine ........................ 143Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 151Transmission position display ........ 149Transmission positions .................. 149

Automatic transmissionemergency mode ............................... 155

BBackup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 120Display message ............................ 228

Bag hook ............................................ 264BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 63BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) .................................................... 63Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 77Important safety notes .................... 77Replacing ......................................... 77

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 308Display message ............................ 231Important safety notes .................. 306Jump starting ................................. 310

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 210Display message ............................ 234Notes/function .............................. 189see Active Blind Spot Assist

Brake Assistsee BAS (Brake Assist System)

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 221Notes ............................................. 356

Brake fluid level ................................ 291Brake lamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 120Display message ............................ 227

BrakesABS .................................................. 62BAS .................................................. 63BAS PLUS ........................................ 63Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 356Display message ............................ 219Driving tips .................................... 162High-performance brake system .... 164Important safety notes .................. 162Maintenance .................................. 163Parking brake ................................ 159Warning lamp ................................. 247

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away/tow-starting

Bulbssee Changing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retailcustomers and lessees .................... 22

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

Index 5

CareCarpets .......................................... 297Car wash ........................................ 292Display ........................................... 296Exterior lights ................................ 295Gear or selector lever .................... 296Interior ........................................... 296Matte finish ................................... 293Notes ............................................. 291Paint .............................................. 293Plastic trim .................................... 296Power washer ................................ 292Rear view camera .......................... 295Roof lining ...................................... 297Seat belt ........................................ 297Seat cover ..................................... 297Sensors ......................................... 295Steering wheel ............................... 296Tail pipes ....................................... 295Trim pieces .................................... 296Washing by hand ........................... 292Wheels ........................................... 293Windows ........................................ 294Wiper blades .................................. 294Wooden trim .................................. 296

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 264Car wash (care) ................................. 292CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 207Center console

Lower section .................................. 33Upper section .................................. 32

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 213Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 75

Changing bulbsBrake lamps ................................... 120Cornering light function ................. 119High-beam headlamps ................... 118Important safety notes .................. 117Low-beam headlamps .................... 118Overview of bulb types .................. 117Parking lamps ................................ 119Reversing lamps ............................ 120Standing lamps (front) ................... 119

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 61Rear doors ....................................... 61

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 56Restraint systems ............................ 56

Child seatLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 59Special seat belt retractor ............... 59Top Tether ....................................... 60

Cigarette lighter ................................ 268Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 295Climate control

Automatic climate control (3-zone) .............................................. 129Controlling automatically ............... 131Cooling with air dehumidification . . 130Defrosting the windows ................. 134Defrosting the windshield .............. 133Dual-zone automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 127Important safety notes .................. 126Indicator lamp ................................ 131Information on using 3-zoneautomatic climate control .............. 130Maximum cooling .......................... 134Notes on using automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 128Overview of systems ...................... 126Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 131Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 134Rear control panel ......................... 129Setting the air distribution ............. 132Setting the airflow ......................... 133Setting the air vents ...................... 135Setting the climate mode ............... 131Setting the temperature ................ 132Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 134Switching on/off ........................... 130Switching residual heat on/off ...... 135

6 Index

Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 134Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 133

CockpitOverview .......................................... 28see Instrument cluster

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch .......................... 112Compass

Calibrating ..................................... 282Calling up ....................................... 282Setting ........................................... 282

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 204Convenience closing feature .............. 87Convenience opening feature ............ 87Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 290Display message ............................ 230Filling capacity ............................... 357Important safety notes .................. 356Temperature (on-board computer) . 215Temperature gauge ........................ 201Warning lamp ................................. 254

Coolingsee Climate control

Cornering light functionChanging bulbs .............................. 119Display message ............................ 226Function/notes ............................. 114

Crash-responsive emergencylighting ............................................... 117Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 166Deactivating ................................... 167Display message ............................ 237Driving system ............................... 165Function/notes ............................. 165Important safety notes .................. 165Setting a speed .............................. 167Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 166

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 266Important safety notes .................. 265Rear compartment ......................... 266

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 25Customer Relations Department ....... 25

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterDashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 228Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 212Switching on/off (switch) .............. 111

Dealershipssee Qualified specialist workshop

Delayed switch-offExterior lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 212Interior lighting .............................. 213

Diagnostics connection ...................... 24Digital speedometer ......................... 205Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 296Display message

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 286Display messages

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 218Driving systems ............................. 232Engine ............................................ 230General notes ................................ 218Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 218KEYLESS-GO .................................. 243Lights ............................................. 226Safety systems .............................. 219SmartKey ....................................... 243Tires ............................................... 238Vehicle ........................................... 241

Distance display (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 209Distance recorder ............................. 204

see Trip odometerDistance warning (warning lamp) .... 256DISTRONIC PLUS

Deactivating ................................... 175Display message ............................ 235

Index 7

Displays in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 174Driving tips .................................... 176Function/notes ............................. 167Important safety notes .................. 167Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 173Warning lamp ................................. 256

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 213Automatic locking (switch) ............... 82Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 75Control panel ................................... 35Display message ............................ 242Emergency locking ........................... 82Emergency unlocking ....................... 82Important safety notes .................... 80Opening (from inside) ...................... 81

Drinking and driving ......................... 161Drinks holder

see Cup holderDrive program

Automatic ...................................... 151Display ........................................... 149Manual ........................................... 153SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 215

Drive program selector ..................... 151Driver's door

see DoorsDriving abroad

Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 287Symmetrical low beam .................. 110

Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps

Driving on flooded roads .................. 164Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 62ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 67BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 63BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) ............................................... 63Electronic brake force distribution ... 67ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .......................................... 64

ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ........................................... 65Important safety information ........... 62Overview .......................................... 62PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 68

Driving systemsActive Blind Spot Assist ................. 193Active Driving Assistancepackage ......................................... 193Active Lane Keeping Assist ............ 196ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 188Blind Spot Assist ............................ 189Cruise control ................................ 165Display message ............................ 232DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 167Dynamic handling package withsports mode .................................. 177HOLD function ............................... 178Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 191Lane Tracking package .................. 189Parking Guidance ........................... 184PARKTRONIC ................................. 181RACE START (AMG vehicles) .......... 179Rear view camera .......................... 187

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 150Brakes ........................................... 162Break-in period .............................. 140DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 176Downhill gradient ........................... 162Drinking and driving ....................... 161Driving abroad ............................... 110Driving in winter ............................. 165Driving on flooded roads ................ 164Driving on wet roads ...................... 164Exhaust check ............................... 161Fuel ................................................ 160General .......................................... 160Hydroplaning ................................. 164Icy road surfaces ........................... 165Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ................................... 163Snow chains .................................. 321Symmetrical low beam .................. 110Wet road surface ........................... 163

Drowsiness detection assistancesystem

see ATTENTION ASSIST

8 Index

DVD audio (on-board computer) ...... 207DVD video (on-board computer) ...... 207Dynamic handling package withsports mode ....................................... 177

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 214Function/notes ............................. 102

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 103Function/notes ............................. 102Switching on/off ........................... 214

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Display message ............................ 220Function/notes ................................ 67

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 161On-board computer ....................... 204

ECO start/stop functionDeactivating/activating ................. 145General information ....................... 144

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Electronic Traction Systemsee ETS/4ETS (ElectronicTraction System)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 82Fuel filler flap ................................. 157Trunk ............................................... 85Vehicle ............................................. 82

Emergency spare wheelStorage location ............................ 301

Emergency Tensioning DevicesFunction ........................................... 56Safety guidelines ............................. 40

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 22

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 253Display message ............................ 230ECO start/stop function ................ 144Engine number ............................... 352Irregular running ............................ 147Jump-starting ................................. 310

Starting problems .......................... 147Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 143Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 143Switching off .................................. 159Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 314

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 147

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 289Additives ........................................ 356Checking the oil level ..................... 288Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 289Display message ............................ 231Filling capacity ............................... 355Notes about oil grades ................... 355Notes on oil level/consumption .... 288Temperature (on-board computer) . 215Viscosity ........................................ 356

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 215Deactivating/activating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 66Deactivating/activating (exceptAMG vehicles) ................................ 209Deactivating/activating (notes;except AMG vehicles) ...................... 65Display message ............................ 219ETS/4ETS ........................................ 65Function/notes ................................ 64Important safety information ........... 64Warning lamp ................................. 249

ETS/4ETS (Electronic TractionSystem) ................................................ 65Exhaust check ................................... 161Exhaust tail pipe (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 295Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 110see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 103Dipping (automatic) ....................... 105Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 104

Index 9

Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 214Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 105Setting ........................................... 104Storing settings (memoryfunction) ........................................ 106Storing the parking position .......... 105

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 261

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFirst-aid kit ......................................... 300Flat tire

Changing a wheel/mounting thespare wheel ................................... 302MOExtended run-flat system ......... 301Preparing the vehicle ..................... 301Raising the vehicle ......................... 303

Floormat ............................................. 283Fog lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 112Front fog lamps

Display message ............................ 227Switching on/off ........................... 112

FuelAdditives ........................................ 354Consumption statistics .................. 204Displaying the currentconsumption .................................. 204Displaying the range ...................... 204Driving tips .................................... 160Flexible fuel vehicles ...................... 354Fuel gauge ....................................... 29Grade (gasoline) ............................ 353Important safety notes .................. 352Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 353Problem (malfunction) ................... 158Refueling ........................................ 156Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 353

Fuel filler flapEmergency release ........................ 157Opening/closing ............................ 156

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 204

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 353Problem (malfunction) ................... 158

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 300Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 314Before changing ............................. 314Dashboard fuse box ....................... 314Fuse box in the enginecompartment ................................. 315Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 315Important safety notes .................. 314

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 281Important safety notes .................. 278Opening/closing the garage door .. 281Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 279

Gear indicator (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 215Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 296Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 350Glove box ........................................... 261

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ...................... 113Headlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 290Cleaning system (capacity) ............ 358Cleaning system (function) ............ 113Cleaning system (notes) ................ 357Fogging up ..................................... 115see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraintsAdjusting ......................................... 97Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 98Adjusting (manually) ........................ 97Adjusting (rear) ................................ 98

10 Index

Installing/removing (rear) ................ 99Luxury .............................................. 98see NECK-PRO head restraintssee NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 118Display message ............................ 227Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 114Switching on/off ........................... 113

Hill start assist .................................. 144HOLD function

Display message ............................ 233Function/notes ............................. 178

HoodClosing ........................................... 288Display message ............................ 242Opening ......................................... 287

Hydroplaning ..................................... 164

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 70Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsInstrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 29Settings ......................................... 211Warning and indicator lamps ........... 30

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 200Interior lighting ................................. 116

Automatic control .......................... 116Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 213Emergency lighting ........................ 117Manual control ............................... 116Overview ........................................ 116Reading lamp ................................. 116

JJack

Storage location ............................ 300Using ............................................. 303

Jump-start (engine)see Jump starting (engine)

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 310

KKEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 88Display message ............................ 243Locking ............................................ 75Start/Stop button .......................... 142Starting the engine ........................ 143Unlocking ......................................... 75

Key positionsKEYLESS-GO .................................. 142SmartKey ....................................... 141

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 150Manual drive program .................... 154

Knee bag .............................................. 43

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane detection (automatic)

see Lane Keeping AssistLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 210Display message ............................ 233Function/information .................... 191

Lane Tracking package ..................... 189Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 215LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 59Light function, active

Display message ............................ 228Lights

Activating/deactivating theinterior lighting delayed switch-off . 213Active light function ....................... 114Automatic headlamp mode ............ 111Cornering light function ................. 114Display message ............................ 226

Index 11

Driving abroad ............................... 110Fog lamps ...................................... 112Hazard warning lamps ................... 113High beam flasher .......................... 113High-beam headlamps ................... 113Light switch ................................... 110Low-beam headlamps .................... 111Parking lamps ................................ 112Rear fog lamp ................................ 112Standing lamps .............................. 112Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 212Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 212Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) .................... 111Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 212Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 212Turn signals ................................... 112see Changing bulbssee Interior lighting

Light sensor (display message) ....... 229Loading guidelines ............................ 260Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 82Emergency locking ........................... 82From inside (central lockingbutton) ............................................. 81

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 213Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 118Display message ............................ 226Setting for driving abroad(symmetrical) ................................. 110Switching on/off ........................... 111

Lumbar supportAdjusting ......................................... 99Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 99

Luxury head restraints ....................... 98

MM+S tires ............................................ 320Malfunction message

see Display messagesMatte finish (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 293mbrace

Call priority .................................... 274Display message ............................ 221Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 275Downloading routes ....................... 277Emergency call .............................. 272Geo fencing ................................... 278Important safety notes .................. 270Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 276MB info call button ........................ 274Remote vehicle locking .................. 276Roadside Assistance button .......... 273Search & Send ............................... 275Self-test ......................................... 271Speed alert .................................... 278System .......................................... 271Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 278Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 276Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 275

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 76Locking vehicle ................................ 82Unlocking the driver's door .............. 82

Memory card (audio) ......................... 207Memory function ............................... 106Message memory (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 218Messages

see Display messagesMirrors

see Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 207

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 76

12 Index

MOExtended run-flat system ........... 301MP3

Operation ....................................... 207see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 203Permanent display ......................... 212

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer . 201Overview .......................................... 31

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 205see separate operating instructions

NECK-PRO head restraintsOperation ......................................... 50Resetting after being triggered ........ 51

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsOperation ......................................... 50Resetting after being triggered ........ 51

Notes on breaking-in a newvehicle ................................................ 140

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 49Operation ......................................... 45System self-test ............................... 48

Occupant safetyChildren in the vehicle ..................... 56System overview .............................. 38

OCSFaults ............................................... 49Operation ......................................... 45System self-test ............................... 48

Odometer ........................................... 204see Trip odometer

Oilsee Engine oil

On-board computerAMG menu ..................................... 215Assistance menu ........................... 209Audio menu ................................... 206Convenience submenu .................. 214

Displaying a service message ........ 286Display messages .......................... 218DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 174Factory settings submenu ............. 215Important safety notes .................. 200Instrument cluster submenu .......... 211Lighting submenu .......................... 212Menu overview .............................. 203Message memory .......................... 218Navigation menu ............................ 205Operation ....................................... 201RACETIMER ................................... 215Service menu ................................. 211Settings menu ............................... 211Standard display ............................ 204Telephone menu ............................ 207Trip menu ...................................... 204Vehicle submenu ........................... 213Video DVD operation ..................... 207

Opening and closing the side trimpanels ................................................. 119Operating safety

Diagnostics connection ................... 24Operating system

see On-board computerOutside temperature display ........... 201Overhead control panel ...................... 34Override feature

Rear side windows ........................... 61

PPaint code number ............................ 351Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 293Panic alarm .......................................... 38Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel

Opening/closing .............................. 90Opening/closing the rollersunblind ........................................... 91Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92Resetting ......................................... 91

Panorama sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 89

Parking ............................................... 158Important safety notes .................. 158Parking brake ................................ 159

Index 13

Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 105Rear view camera .......................... 187see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidParking Guidance ........................... 184see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 220Notes/function .............................. 159Warning lamp ................................. 252

Parking GuidanceDisplay message ............................ 234Important safety notes .................. 184

Parking lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 119Switching on/off ........................... 112

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 183Driving system ............................... 181Function/notes ............................. 181Important safety notes .................. 181Problem (malfunction) ................... 184Range of the sensors ..................... 181Warning display ............................. 182

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 45Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 296Power washers .................................. 292Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 221Operation ......................................... 50

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 210Display message ............................ 222Function/notes ................................ 68Warning lamp ................................. 256

Product information ............................ 21Program selector button .................. 150Protection of the environment

General notes .................................. 21Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 143

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 25

RRACE START (AMG vehicles) ............. 179RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 215Radar sensor system

Activating/deactivating ................. 213Display message ............................ 233

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 206see separate operating instructions

Reading lamp ..................................... 116Rear compartment

Setting the airflow ......................... 133Setting the air vents ...................... 137

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 227Switching on/off ........................... 112

Rear seatDisplay message ............................ 242Folding the backrest forwards/back ............................................... 263

Rear view cameraCleaning instructions ..................... 295Function/notes ............................. 187

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 103Dipping (automatic) ....................... 105

Rear window blind ............................ 267Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 134Switching on/off ........................... 134

RefuelingFuel gauge ....................................... 29Important safety notes .................. 156Refueling process .......................... 156see Fuel

Releasing the parking lockmanually (automatictransmission) ..................................... 155Remote control

Garage door opener ....................... 278Programming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 279

Reporting safety defects .................... 25

14 Index

Reserve (fuel tank)see Fuel

Reserve fuelDisplay message ............................ 232Warning lamp ................................. 253see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 135Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Reverse gearEngaging (automatictransmission) ................................. 148

Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 23Roller blind

see Roller sunblindRoller sunblind

Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel ..................................... 91Rear side windows ......................... 267Rear window .................................. 267

Roof carrier ........................................ 265Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 297Roof load (maximum) ........................ 358Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation)Route guidance (navigation) ............ 205

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 56Child restraint systems .................... 56Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 45Overview of occupant safetysystems ........................................... 38

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 54Adjusting the height ......................... 55Belt force limiters ............................ 56Cleaning ......................................... 297Correct usage .................................. 53Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 56

Fastening ......................................... 54Important safety guidelines ............. 52Releasing ......................................... 55Safety guidelines ............................. 40Special seat belt retractor ............... 59Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 214Warning lamp ................................. 245Warning lamp (function) ................... 55

SeatsAdaptive seat backrests (AMGvehicles) ........................................ 100Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 97Adjusting (manually andelectrically) ...................................... 96Adjusting lumbar support ................ 99Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 99Adjusting the head restraint ............ 97Cleaning the cover ......................... 297Correct driver's seat position ........... 94Important safety notes .................... 95Seat heating problem .................... 101Seat ventilation problem ................ 101Storing settings (memoryfunction) ........................................ 106Switching seat heating on/off ....... 100Switching seat ventilation on/off . . 101

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 295Service

see ASSYST PLUSService menu (on-board computer) . 211Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 356Coolant (engine) ............................ 356Engine oil ....................................... 355Fuel ................................................ 352Important safety notes .................. 352Washer fluid ................................... 357

Service worksee ASSYST PLUS

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 215On-board computer ....................... 211

Setting the air distribution ............... 132Setting the airflow ............................ 133SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 215Side impact air bag ............................. 43

Index 15

Side marker lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 228Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 294Convenience closing feature ............ 87Convenience opening feature .......... 87Important safety information ........... 86Opening/closing .............................. 86Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89Resetting ......................................... 88

Sliding sunroofImportant safety notes .................... 89Opening/closing .............................. 90Problem (malfunction) ..................... 92Resetting ......................................... 90see Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 77Changing the programming ............. 76Checking the battery ....................... 77Convenience closing feature ............ 87Convenience opening feature .......... 87Display message ............................ 243Door central locking/unlocking ....... 75Important safety notes .................... 74Loss ................................................. 79Mechanical key ................................ 76Positions (ignition lock) ................. 141Problem (malfunction) ..................... 79Starting the engine ........................ 143

Snow chains ...................................... 321Sockets

General notes ................................ 269Rear compartment ......................... 269

Spare wheelNotes/data .................................... 345Storage location ............................ 301

Specialist workshop ............................ 25Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Digital ............................................ 205In the Instrument cluster ................. 29Segments ...................................... 201Selecting the unit ofmeasurement ................................ 211see Instrument cluster

SPORT handling modeActivating/deactivating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 66Warning lamp ................................. 250

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Display message ............................ 222Introduction ..................................... 39Warning lamp ................................. 252Warning lamp (function) ................... 39

Standing lampsChanging bulbs .............................. 119Display message ............................ 228Switching on/off ........................... 112

Starting (engine) ................................ 143Steering (display message) .............. 243Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 102Adjusting (manually) ...................... 102Button overview ............................... 31Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 201Cleaning ......................................... 296Important safety notes .................. 101Paddle shifters ............................... 151Storing settings (memoryfunction) ........................................ 106

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 151Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 215Stowage areas ................................... 260Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 261Cup holders ................................... 265Eyeglasses compartment ............... 261Glove box ....................................... 261Important safety information ......... 260Rear ............................................... 262Stowage net ................................... 262Under driver's seat/front-passenger seat .............................. 262

Stowage net ....................................... 262Stowage well beneath the trunkfloor .................................................... 264Summer opening

see Convenience opening featureSummer tires ..................................... 320Sun visor ............................................ 266

16 Index

Supplement Restraint Systemsee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Surround lighting (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 212Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 134Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 70

TTachometer ........................................ 201Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 227Tank content

Fuel gauge ....................................... 29Technical data

Capacities ...................................... 352Information .................................... 350Tires/wheels ................................. 343Vehicle data ................................... 358

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 274Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 275Downloading routes ....................... 277Emergency call .............................. 272Geo fencing ................................... 278Important safety notes .................. 270Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 276MB info call button ........................ 274Remote vehicle locking .................. 276Roadside Assistance button .......... 273Search & Send ............................... 275Self-test ......................................... 271Speed alert .................................... 278System .......................................... 271Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 278Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 276Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 275

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 208Display message ............................ 243Menu (on-board computer) ............ 207Number from the phone book ........ 208Redialing ........................................ 208Rejecting/ending a call ................. 208

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 201Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 215Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 215Outside temperature ...................... 201Setting (climate control) ................ 132

TEMPOMATDisplay message (12-buttonmultifunction steering wheel) ........ 237

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 70Immobilizer ...................................... 70

Through-loading feature ................... 262Time

see Separate Operator's ManualTiming (RACETIMER) ......................... 215Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 326Checking manually ........................ 325Display message ............................ 238Maximum ....................................... 324Notes ............................................. 323Pressure loss warning .................... 325Recommended ............................... 322

Tire pressure monitoring systemFunction/notes ............................. 326Restarting ...................................... 329Warning lamp ................................. 257

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 341Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 339Bar (definition) ............................... 339Characteristics .............................. 339Checking ........................................ 319Definition of terms ......................... 339Direction of rotation ...................... 342Display message ............................ 238Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 341DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 338DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 339GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 340GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 340

Index 17

GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 340Important safety notes .................. 318Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 339Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 340Labeling (overview) ........................ 335Load bearing index (definition) ...... 341Load index ..................................... 338Load index (definition) ................... 340Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 340Maximum load on a tire(definition) ..................................... 340Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 340Maximum tire load ......................... 333Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 340Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 341PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 340Replacing ....................................... 342Service life ..................................... 319Sidewall (definition) ....................... 341Speed rating (definition) ................ 340Storing ........................................... 342Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 339Temperature .................................. 335TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 341Tire bead (definition) ...................... 341Tire pressure (definition) ................ 341Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 339Tire size (data) ............................... 343Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 336Tire tread ....................................... 319Tire tread (definition) ..................... 341Total load limit (definition) ............. 341Traction ......................................... 334Traction (definition) ....................... 341Tread wear ..................................... 334Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 334Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 339

Unladen weight (definition) ............ 340Wear indicator (definition) ............. 341Wheel rim (definition) .................... 339see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 60Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 311Installing the towing eye ................ 312Removing the towing eye ............... 313With the rear axle raised ................ 313

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 313

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 314Important safety notes .................. 311

Transfer case ..................................... 155Transmission

see Automatic transmissionTransporting the vehicle .................. 313Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 296Trip computer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 204Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 204Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 205

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 85Important safety notes .................... 83Locking separately ........................... 85Opening (automatically frominside) .............................................. 84Opening (automatically fromoutside) ............................................ 84

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 242Opening/closing .............................. 83Opening dimensions ...................... 358

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 358Turn signals

Display message ............................ 226Switching on/off ........................... 112

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

18 Index

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 82From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 81

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 266Vehicle

Data acquisition ............................... 26Display message ............................ 241Emergency unlocking ....................... 82Equipment ....................................... 22Individual settings .......................... 211Limited Warranty ............................. 26Loading .......................................... 329Locking (in an emergency) ............... 82Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 75Lowering ........................................ 305Maintenance .................................... 23Parking for a long period ................ 160Pulling away ................................... 143Raising ........................................... 303Reporting problems ......................... 25Towing away .................................. 311Transporting .................................. 313Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 82Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 75Vehicle data ................................... 358

Vehicle data ....................................... 358Vehicle dimensions ........................... 358Vehicle emergency locking ................ 82Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 351Vehicle tool kit .................................. 300Video (DVD) ........................................ 207VIN ...................................................... 351

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 247Brakes ........................................... 247Check Engine ................................. 253Coolant .......................................... 254Distance warning ........................... 256

DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 256ESP® .............................................. 249ESP® OFF ....................................... 250Fuel tank ........................................ 253Overview .......................................... 30PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 45Reserve fuel ................................... 253Seat belt ........................................ 245SPORT handling mode ................... 250SRS ................................................ 252Tire pressure monitor .................... 257

Warranty ............................................ 350Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 243Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 305Wheel chock ...................................... 303Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 302Checking ........................................ 319Cleaning ......................................... 293Important safety notes .................. 318Interchanging/changing ................ 342Mounting a new wheel ................... 305Removing a wheel .......................... 305Storing ........................................... 342Tightening torque ........................... 305Wheel size/tire size ....................... 343

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 223Operation ......................................... 45

Windowssee Side windows

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 133

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer system .............. 290Filling capacity ............................... 358Notes ............................................. 357

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 122Replacing the wiper blades ............ 122Switching on/off ........................... 121

Index 19

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 320Slippery road surfaces ................... 165Snow chains .................................. 321

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 320

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 294Important safety notes .................. 122Replacing (windshield) ................... 122

Wooden trim (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 296Workshops

see Qualified specialist workshop

20 Index

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of integratedenvironmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear depend onthe following factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuelconsumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuelconsumption.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.

Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Environmental concerns andrecommendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try toregenerate or re-use them. Observe therelevant environmental rules and regulationswhen disposing of materials. In this way youwill help to protect the environment.

Product information

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usegenuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversionparts and accessories that have beenapproved for your vehicle.Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well asconversion parts and accessories that havebeen specifically approved for your vehicle fortheir reliability, safety and suitability. Despiteongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz isunable to assess other parts. Therefore,Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility forthe use of such parts in Mercedes-Benzvehicles. This is also the case, even if theyhave been independently or officiallyapproved. The use of non-approved partscould affect your vehicle's operating safety.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approvedconversion parts and accessories areavailable from any authorizedMercedes-BenzCenter. Here, you will receive advice aboutpermissible technical modifications, and theparts will be professionally installed.

Introduction 21

Z

Operator's Manual

General notesBefore you first drive off, read this Operator'sManual carefully and familiarize yourself withyour vehicle.For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,follow the instructions and warning notices inthis manual. Disregarding them may lead todamage to the vehicle or personal injury.Vehicle damage resulting from the disregardof the instructions is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all features described.This also applies to safety-related systemsand functions. The equipment in your vehiclemay therefore differ from some of thedescriptions or illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists allsystems installed in your vehicle.Contact an authorizedMercedes-BenzCenterif you have any questions about equipment oroperation.The Operator's Manual and the MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet. Yourauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Information for customers inCaliforniaIn California, you have the right to exchangea vehicle or receive a refund of the purchaseor leasing price if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCand/or an authorized workshop ormaintenance facility cannot, after severalauthorized repairs, rectify considerabledamage to or malfunctions of the vehicle thatare covered by the contractual warranty.During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) onthe odometer of the vehicle, whicheveroccurs first, a reasonable number of repairattempts is presumed for a retail buyer orlessee if one or more of the following occurs:(1) the serious defect or damage can result

in deadly or serious injury to the vehicleoccupants while driving AND this defecthas already been repaired at least twiceAND Mercedes-Benz, LLC has been

22 Introduction

informed in writing of the necessity of arepair.

(2) the defect or damage, though lessserious than (1) above, has already beenrepaired at least four times ANDMercedes-Benz has been informed inwriting of the necessity of a repair.

(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longerthan 30 calendar days because of repairwork resulting from this or other seriousdefects or damage.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and WarrantyBooklet with you when you bring the vehicleto an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event ofa breakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (USA) or the "RoadsideAssistance" section in the Service andWarranty booklet (Canada). You will find bothin your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change ofownershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet orsimply call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) at the hotlinenumber1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us incontacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalyticconverter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USA

Introduction 23

Z

Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWork improperly carried out on electroniccomponents and associated software couldcause them to cease functioning. Because thevehicle's electronic components areinterconnected, any modifications made mayproduce an undesired effect on othersystems. Electronic malfunctions couldseriously impair the operating safety of yourvehicle.Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Centerfor repairs or modifications to electroniccomponents.Other improper work or modifications on thevehicle could also have a negative impact onthe operating safety of the vehicle.Some safety systems only function when theengine is running. You should therefore neverturn off the engine while driving.

G WARNINGHeavy blows against the vehicle underbody ortires/wheels may cause serious damage andimpair the operating safety of your vehicle.Such blows can be caused, for example, byrunning over an obstacle, road debris or apothole.

If you feel a sudden significant vibration orride disturbance, or you suspect that damageto your vehicle has occurred:Rturn on your hazard warning flashers.Rslow down carefully.Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safedistance from the road.

Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/wheels for possible damage. If the vehicleappears unsafe, have it towed to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or otherqualified maintenance or repair facility forfurther inspection or repairs.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: 1) These devices may not causeharmful interference, and 2) These devicesmust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connection

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the on-boarddiagnostics connection, it can affect the

24 Introduction

operation of the vehicle systems. This canimpair the operating safety of your vehiclewhile driving. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to the on-board diagnostics connection.

G WARNINGLoose equipment or equipment cables whichare connected to the on-board diagnosticsconnection can obstruct the area around thepedals. The equipment or the cables couldcome between the pedals in the event ofsudden braking or acceleration. This mayaffect the function of the pedals. There is arisk of an accident.Do not attach any equipment or cables in thedriver's footwell.

! If the engine is switched off andequipment on the diagnostics connectionis used, the starter battery may discharge.

The diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can, for example, lead toemissions monitoring information beingreset. This may lead to the vehicle failing tomeet the requirements of the next emissionstest during the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has thenecessary specialist knowledge, tools andqualifications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the MaintenanceBooklet.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance work

Rrepair workRalterations, installation work andmodificationsRwork on electronic components

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center orcontact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is reproduced as requiredof all manufacturers according to Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it

Introduction 25

Z

may order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can obtain additional information aboutvehicle safety from:http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic dataacquisition in the vehicle(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Your vehicle records electronic data. If yourvehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event ofan accident.This information helps, for example, to testvehicle systems after an accident and tocontinually improve vehicle safety.Daimler AG can access this data and submitit:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosispurposesRwith the consent of the vehicle owner

Ron the instruction of prosecutingauthoritiesRfor use in arbitration of disputes thatinvolve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its salesand service organizationsRas otherwise required or permitted by law.Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) purchase agreement to find out moreabout data that can be recorded andtransmitted by this system.

26 Introduction

Cockpit ................................................. 28Instrument cluster .............................. 29Multifunction steering wheel ............. 31Center console .................................... 32Overhead control panel ...................... 34Door control panel .............................. 35

27

Ataglance

Cockpit

Function Page: Steering wheel paddle

shifters 151

; Combination switch 112

= Instrument cluster 29

? Horn

A PARKTRONIC warningdisplay (Canada only) 181

B Overhead control panel 34

C Climate control systems 126

D Ignition lock 141Start/Stop button 142

Function PageE Adjusting the steering

wheel manually 101

F Adjusting the steeringwheel electrically 101

G Cruise control lever 166

H Parking brake 159

I Diagnostics connection 24

J Opening the hood 287

K Releasing the parking brake 159

L Light switch 110

28 CockpitAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page: Fuel gauge

; Coolant temperature 201

= Speedometer withsegments 201

Function Page? Multifunction display 203

A Tachometer 201

B Instrument lighting 200

Instrument cluster 29

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page: ÷ ESP® 249

M SPORT handlingmode in AMG vehicles 250

; · Distance warning 256

= å ESP® OFF 249

? $ Brakes (USA only) 247

A J Brakes (Canada only) 247

B #! Turn signals 112

C ! ABS 247

D 6 SRS 252

E ; Check Engine 253

F h Tire pressure monitor 257

Function PageG ü Seat belt 245

H ÷ ESP® in AMG vehicles 250

I ? Coolant 254

J K High-beamheadlamps 113

K L Low-beamheadlamps 111

L T Parking lamps 112

M R Rear fog lamp 112

N N Front fog lamps 112

O 8 Reserve fuel 253

30 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page: Multifunction display 203

; Audio/COMAND display;see the separate operatinginstructions

= ?

Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 207Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmemoryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function PageA =;

Selects a menu 2019:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 201a

Confirms your selection 201Hides display messages 218

B %

Back 201Switches off the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

Multifunction steering wheel 31

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page: Audio system/COMAND;

see the separate operatinginstructions

; c Seat heating 100

= s Seat ventilation 101

? c PARKTRONIC(Canada only) 181

A £ Hazard warninglamps 113

Function PageB 45 Indicator lamp 45

C u Roller sunblind in therear window 267

D M Dynamic drivingpackage with sports mode 177å AMG vehicles: ESP® 66

32 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

Function PageE Stowage compartment 260

Ashtray 268Cigarette lighter 268

F Selector lever 148

G Cup holders 265

H Stowage compartment 260

Function PageI Audio/COMAND

controller; see the separateoperating instructions

J Ú Selects the driveprogram 150

Center console 33

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page: u Switches the rear

interior lighting on/off 116

; | Switches theautomatic interior lightingcontrol on/off 116

= p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 116

? 3 Opens/closes thesliding sunroof 903 Opens/closes thepanorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel with rollersunblinds 90

A ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 274

B G SOS button (mbracesystem) 272

Function PageC Rear-view mirror 103

D Buttons for the garage dooropener 281

E Integrated electroniccompass 282

F Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System1

G F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbracesystem) 273

H p Switches the left-hand reading lamp on/off 116

I c Switches the frontinterior lighting on/off 116

1 The Voice Control System is only available in combination with COMAND. Observe the additional operatinginstructions.

34 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page: Opens the door 81

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 81

= Adjusts the seatselectrically 97

? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors andsteering wheel 106

A 7Zö\Adjusts and folds theexterior mirrors in/outelectrically 103

Function PageB W Opens/closes the

side windows 86

C n Activates/deactivates the overridefeature for the sidewindows in the rearcompartment 61

D o Opens the trunk lid 84

Door control panel 35

Ataglance

36

Useful information .............................. 38Panic alarm .......................................... 38Occupant safety .................................. 38Children in the vehicle ........................ 56Driving safety systems ....................... 62Theft deterrent locking system ......... 70

37

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: forapproximately one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.The KEYLESS-GO key must be in thevehicle.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-Gen ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

Occupant safety

Overview of occupant safetyIn this section, you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:Rseat beltsRchild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchors

38 Occupant safetySafety

Additional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RNECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraintsRair bag system components with:

- PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp- front-passenger seat with OccupantClassification System (OCS)

The different air bag systems workindependently of each other. The protectivefunctions of the system work in conjunctionwith each other. Not all air bags are alwaysdeployed in an accident.

G WARNINGModifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint system componentsor their wiring, as well as tampering withinterconnected electronic systems, can leadto the restraint systems no longer functioningas intended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deployinadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do nottamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.

i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle restraintsystems for infants and children, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 56).

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSRS consists of:RThe 6 SRS warning lampRAir bagsRAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)REmergency Tensioning DevicesRBelt force limiters

SRS reduces the risk of occupants cominginto contact with the vehicle's interior in theevent of an accident. It can also reduce theeffect of the forces to which occupants aresubjected during an accident.

SRS warning lampSRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The6 SRSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the 6 SRS warning lampgoes out while the engine is running.

G WARNINGThe SRS self-check has detected amalfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp:Rdoes not light up at allRdoes not go out after approximately fourseconds after the engine is startedRcomes on after the engine was started orwhile driving.

For your safety, Mercedes-Benz stronglyrecommends that you have the systemchecked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. SRS may otherwisefail to activate when it is needed in the eventof an accident, which could lead to serious orfatal injuries. SRS might also be activatedunexpectedly and unnecessarily, which couldalso result in injury.In addition, work carried out improperly onSRS may render SRS inoperative or causeunintended air bag deployment. Work on theSRS system should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel. Consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

Occupant safety 39

Safety

Z

for details. USA only: for further informationcontact our Customer Assistance center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

Safety guidelines for seat belts,Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)and air bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check your national disposalguidelines. California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to functionon a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.They could tear.RDo not make any modification that couldchange the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be madeto any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo not change or remove any componentor part of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seatcovers, badges, etc. over the steeringwheel hub, front-passenger front air bagcover, outer sides of the seat backrests,door trim panels, or door frame trims.RDo not install additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.

RKeep area between air bags and occupantsfree of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).RDo not hang items such as coat hangersfrom the coat hooks or handles over thedoor. These items may be thrown around inthe vehicle and cause head and otherinjuries when the window curtain air bag isdeployed.RAir bag systemcomponentswill be hot afteran air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates arisk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection ofothers, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentiallymore seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle isequipped with SRS. Also, refer them to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual.

40 Occupant safetySafety

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the incidenceof injuries and fatalities in certain situations:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-passenger front air bags and driver's kneebag)Rside impacts (side impact air bags, windowcurtain air bags and pelvis air bags)

However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder is released. The powdergenerally does not constitute a health hazardand does not indicate that there is a fire in thevehicle. In order to prevent potentialbreathing difficulties, you should leave thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave any breathing difficulty but cannot getout of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,then get fresh air by opening a window ordoor.

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passengermust always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of acollision, you must always be in the normalseat position with your back against thebackrest. Fasten your seat belt andmake surethat it is correctly positioned on your body.

As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag, as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly andin a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back aspossible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm). Youshould be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Rdo not lean your head or chest close to thesteering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.Placing hands and arms inside the rim canincrease the risk and potential severity ofhand/arm injury if the driver front air baginflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far backas possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.Roccupants, especially children, shouldnever place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the sideimpact air bag inflates. This could result inserious or fatal injuries should the sideimpact air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sizedinfant restraint, toddler restraint or boosterseat recommended for the size and weightof the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator's Manual.

G WARNINGAccident research shows that the safest placefor children in an automobile is in a rear seat.A side impact air bag related injury may occurif occupants, especially children, are notproperly seated or restrained when next to aside impact air bag which needs to deployrapidly in a side impact in order to do its job.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possibleand use the seat belts properly.Make sure that children 12 yearsold and under use an appropriatelysized child restraint, infantrestraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size andweight of the child.

(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

The air bags are only deployed if the air bagcontrol unit detects the need for deployment.Only in the event of such a situation, will theair bags provide their supplementalprotection.If the driver and front passenger do not weartheir seat belts, it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplementalprotection.In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deploymentthresholds, the air bags will not deploy. Thedriver and passengers will then be protectedto the extent possible by a properly fastenedseat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection if the vehicle rolls over.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seat

belts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassengers to have deployed air bagsreplaced and to have any malfunctioning airbags repaired. This will help to make sure theair bags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of an accident.

Front air bagsThe front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front-passenger's head andchest.

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.They are deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the system determines that air bagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRif the seat belt is fastenedRindependently of other air bags in thevehicle

Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. In the event of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates the vehicledeceleration. In the first deployment stage,the front air bag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.The front air bag is fully deployed if a second

42 Occupant safetySafety

deployment threshold is exceeded within afew milliseconds.The deployment of the front-passenger frontair bag is also influenced by the weightcategory of the front passenger, which isdetermined by the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) (Y page 45).The lighter the passenger-side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate required(predicted at the start of the impact) forsecond stage inflation of the front-passengerfront air bag. In the second stage, the frontair bags are inflated with the maximumamount of propellant gas available.The front air bags are not deployed insituations where a low impact severity ispredicted. You will then be protected by thefastened seat belt.The front-passenger front air bag will only bedeployed if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weightsensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupied.Rthe 45 indicator lamp on the centerconsole is not lit (Y page 45).Rthe air bag control unit predicts a high-impact severity.

Driver's knee bag

Driver's knee bag: increases the driver'sprotection against:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries

Driver's knee bag: deploys under thesteering column. If, during a frontal collision,the system determines that air bagdeployment can offer additional protection tothat provided by the seat belt, driver's kneebag: is deployed along with the driver's airbag. Driver's knee bag: operates best inconjunction with correctly positioned andfastened seat belts.

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGThe pressure sensors for side impact air bagcontrol are located in the doors. Do notmodify any components of the doors or doortrim panels including, for example, theaddition of door speakers.Improper repair work on the doors or themodification or addition of components to thedoors create a risk of rendering the sideimpact air bags inoperative or causingunintended air bag deployment. Work on thedoors must therefore only be performed byqualified technicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

G WARNINGOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehiclemodel. Using seat covers or other seatcoverings can cause a malfunction of the sideimpact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Centerfor availability.

When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection for the thorax of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs. However, theydo not protect the:RheadRneckRarms

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

Front side impact air bags: and rear sideimpact air bags; deploy next to the outerseat cushions.The side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsSide impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side is not deployed in thefollowing situations:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is notfastened.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Pelvis air bagspelvis air bags are not available for AMGvehicles.

G WARNINGOnly use seat covers which have been testedand approved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehiclemodel. Using seat covers or other seatcoverings can cause a malfunction of the sideimpact air bags and/or the pelvis air bags.Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Centerfor availability.

Pelvis air bag deployment enhances the levelof protection of the vehicle occupants on theside of the vehicle on which the impactoccurs.

Pelvis air bags: deploy next to and belowthe outer seat cushions. They are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsPelvis air bags: will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sideis not deployed in the following situations:ROCS has detected that the front-passengerseat is unoccupied.Rthe front-passenger seat belt is notfastened.

44 Occupant safetySafety

The pelvis air bag on the front-passenger sidewill deploy if the front-passenger seat belt isfastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Window curtain air bagsThewindowcurtain air bags enhance the levelof protection for the head, but not chest orarms, of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.The window curtain air bags are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deploy inthe area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.

Window curtain air bags: are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRregardless of whether the front-passengerseat is occupiedRindependently of seat belt useRindependently of the front air bagsWindow curtain air bags: will not deploy inimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

How the Occupant ClassificationSystem worksThe Occupant Classification System (OCS)categorizes the occupant on the front-passenger seat by means of a weight sensor.The front-passenger front air bag isdeactivated automatically for certain weightcategories. The 45 indicator lampshows you the current status. If the45 indicator lamp lights up, the front-passenger air bag is disabled.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe pelvis air bagRthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning DevicesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possiblewith their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorIf the front-passenger's weight is transferredto another object in the vehicle (e.g. byleaning on armrests), OCS may not be able toapproximate the occupant's weight category.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have thenecessary repair work carried out at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use seataccessories that have been approved byMercedes-Benz.Both the driver and the front passengershould always observe the 45indicator lamp to determine whether or notthe front passenger is positioned correctly.

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminateswhen an adult or someone larger than a small

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

individual is in the front passenger seat, havethe front passenger reposition himself orherself in the seat until the 45indicator lamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front passenger front air bagdeployment when the OCS has classified thefront passenger seat occupant as weighing asmuch as or less than a typical 12-month-oldchild in a standard child restraint or if the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate when the engine is started andremain illuminated. This indicates that thefront passenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat is classified as being empty,the 45 indicator lamp will illuminatewhen the engine is started and remainilluminated. This indicates that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified asbeing heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraint or as being a small individual (suchas a young teenager or a small adult), the45 indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately 6 seconds when the engine isstarted. Depending on occupant weightsensor readings from the seat, it will thenremain illuminated or go out. With the45 indicator lamp illuminated, thefront passenger front air bag is deactivated.With the 45 indicator lamp out, thefront passenger front air bag is activated.When the OCS senses that the frontpassenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a smallindividual, the 45 indicator lamp willilluminate for approximately six secondswhen the engine is started and then go out.

This indicates that the front passenger frontair bag is activated.If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,the front passenger front air bag isdeactivated and will not be deployed.If the 45 indicator lamp is notilluminated, the front passenger front air bagis activated and will be deployedRin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the impact exceeds a predeterminedtriggering thresholdRindependent of the side impact air bag orpelvis air bag

If the front passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will beinfluenced byRthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessedby the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category asidentified by the OCS

For further information, see "Air bag displaymessages" (Y page 225).

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seats whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriate infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and Top Tether strap, or lower anchorsand Top Tether strap, fully in accordance withthe child seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat

46 Occupant safetySafety

recommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the front-passenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate thefront-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means to eliminatethis risk completely is never to place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in the front-passenger seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint on the rearseat.RIf you install a rear-facing child restraint onthe front-passenger seat, make sure the45 indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 45indicator lampnot illuminate or go outwhilethe restraint is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the45 indicator lamp while driving tomake sure that the 45 indicatorlamp is illuminated. If the 45indicator lamp goes out or remains out, donot transport a child on the front-passengerseat until the system has been repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront-passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front-passengerfront air bag inflates.

RIf you place a child in a forward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat:- move the seat as far back as possible- use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size andweight of the child

- secure child restraint with the vehicle'sseat belt according to the child seatmanufacturer's instructions

RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger frontair bag may or may not be activated.

If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy.The OCS may have detected that the seat:Ris either empty or occupied by a personwith a weight up to that of a typical twelve-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraintRis occupied by a small individual, such as ayoung teenager or a small adultRis occupied by a child in a child restraintsystem, whose weight is greater than thatof a typical twelve-month-old child.

These are examples of when the OCSdeactivates the front-passenger front air bag.Deactivation takes place although thecollision fulfills the criteria for deploying thedriver's air bag.

If the SmartKey has been removed from theignition lock or is in position 0, the

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

45 indicator lamp: does not lightup.

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 45indicator lamp light up simultaneously, theOCS is malfunctioning. The front passengerfront air bag will be deactivated in this case.Have the system checked by qualifiedtechnicians as soon as possible. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired or replaced at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.In order to ensure proper operation of the airbag system and OCS:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in aposition that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RWhen seated, a passenger should notposition him/herself in such a way as tocause the passenger's weight to be liftedfrom the seat cushion as this may result inthe OCS being unable to correctlyapproximate the passenger's weightcategory.RRead and observe all warnings in thischapter.

System self-testThe 45 indicator lamp lights up if you:Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lockRon vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button once or twice

When an adult is sitting correctly on the front-passenger seat and is categorized by the OCSsystem as an adult, the 45 indicatorlamp lights up and goes off again afterapproximately six seconds.If the passenger seat is not occupied and theOCS system detects this, the 45indicator lamp remains lit and does not go off.

G WARNINGIf the 4 5 indicator lamp does notilluminate, the system is not functioning. Youmust contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter before seating any child on the frontpassenger seat.

For further information, see "Problems withthe Occupant Classification System"(Y page 49).

G WARNINGNever place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The undersideand rear side child restraint system must beplaced entirely on the seat cushion and thebackrest of the front-passenger seatbackrest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.An incorrectlymounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in case of an accident,instead of increasing protection for the child.Follow the manufacturer's instructions forinstallation of child restraint systems.

48 Occupant safetySafety

Problems with the Occupant Classification System

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The 45indicator lamp lights upand stays on.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of atypical adultRhas been determinedby the system not tobe a child

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 225).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The 45indicator lamp does notlight up and/or doesnot stay on.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with aweight up to that of atypical twelve-month-old child in astandard childrestraint system

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the 45 indicator lamp remains off, have the OCSsystem checked as soon as possible at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on the front-passengerseat as long as the OCS is not functioning.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 225).

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, on the front-passengerseat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

PRE-SAFE® (preventative occupantprotection)

G WARNINGThe PRE-SAFE® system reduces the impact ofan accident on vehicle occupants, as long astheir seat belts have been fastened correctly.Although your vehicle is equipped with a PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of injury in theevent of an accident cannot be ruled out. Youshould therefore always drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the prevailing road,weather and traffic conditions.

PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures toprotect occupants in certain hazardoussituations.PRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rif BAS PLUS intervenes powerfully onvehicles with DISTRONIC PLUSRif, on vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS, theradar sensor system detects an imminentdanger of collision in certain situationsRin critical driving situations, e.g. whenphysical limits are exceeded and thevehicle understeers or oversteers severely

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situationdetected:Rthe front seat belts are pre-tensioned.Ron vehicles with memory function for thefront-passenger seat: the front-passengerseat is adjusted if it is in an unfavorableposition.Rif the vehicle skids, the sliding sunroof/panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel and the side windows are closed sothat only a small gap remains.

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pretensioning. All settings made byPRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.

If the seat belts are not released:X Move the backrest or seat back slightly, butonly when the vehicle is stationary.The belt pretensioning is reduced and thelocking mechanism is released.

G WARNINGMake sure that nobody can become trappedas you adjust the seat.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

More information about seat belt adjustment,a convenience function integrated into PRE-SAFE®, can be found in the "Seat beltadjustment" section (Y page 54).

NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraints (exceptAMG vehicles)NECK-PROhead restraints/NECK-PRO luxuryhead restraints increase protection of thedriver's and front-passenger's head andneck. In the event of a rear collision of acertain severity, the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintson the driver's and front-passenger seats aremoved forwards and upwards. This providesbetter head support.

G WARNINGDo not attach any objects (e.g. a coat hanger)to the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints may not function properly and inthe event of a rear-end collision may not offerthe protection they are designed to provide.

G WARNINGSeat or head restraint covers can cause amalfunction when the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK PRO luxury head restraintsare activated or when the side impact air bags

50 Occupant safetySafety

or pelvis air bags are deployed, or they canprevent this completely. The NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK PRO luxury head restraintsor side impact air bags/pelvis air bags cantherefore not provide the intended protection.Do not use any seat or head restraint covers.

If the NECK-PRO head restraints/NECK-PROluxury head restraints have been triggered inan accident, reset the NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintson the driver's and front-passenger seats(Y page 51). Otherwise, the additionalprotection will not be available in the event ofanother rear-end collision. NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsthat have been triggered are moved forwardsand can no longer be adjusted.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential forinjury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO headrestraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFor reasons of safety, have the NECK-PROhead restraints/NECK-PRO luxury headrestraints checked at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center after a rear-endcollision.

G WARNINGWhen pushing back the NECK-PRO headrestraint cushion, make sure your fingers donot become caught between the head

restraint cushion and the cover. Failure toobserve this could result in injuries.

NECK-PRO head restraintsi Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you havedifficulty resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints, have this work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction ofarrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown in the direction of arrow; as far asit will go.

X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion back in the direction of arrow=until the cushion engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO head restraint.

NECK-PRO luxury head restraintsi If you have difficulty resetting the NECK-PRO luxury head restraints, have this workcarried out at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

X Remove resetting tool: from the vehicledocument wallet.

X Slide resetting tool: into guide;between the NECK-PRO luxury headrestraint and the rear cover of the headrestraint.

X Push resetting tool: downwards until youhear the head restraint deploymentmechanism engage.

X Pull out resetting tool:.X Firmly press the NECK-PRO luxury headrestraint cushion back= until it engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO luxury head restraint.

X Put resetting tool: back into the vehicledocument wallet.

Seat belts

Important safety notesThe use of infant or child restraints is requiredby law in all 50 states, the District ofColumbia, the U.S. territories and allCanadian provinces.Even where this is not the case, all vehicleoccupants should have their seat beltsfastened when the vehicle is in motion.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 56) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

G WARNINGAlways fasten your seat belt before driving off.Always make sure all of your passengers areproperly restrained. You and your passengersshould always wear seat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten andposition your seat belt greatly increases yourrisk of injuries and their likely severity in anaccident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuries canbe considerably more severe without yourseat belt properly buckled. Without your seatbelt buckled, you are much more likely to hitthe interior of the vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, the possibility of injury ordeath is lessened if you are properly wearingyour seat belt. The air bags can only protectas intended if the occupants are properlywearing their seat belts.

G WARNINGNever ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The seat backrest andseat belt provide the best restraint when thewearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and the seat belt is properlypositioned on the body.

G WARNINGNever let more people ride in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts available. Make sureeveryone riding in the vehicle is correctlyrestrained with a separate seat belt. Neveruse a seat belt for more than one person at atime.

G WARNINGDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accident must

52 Occupant safetySafety

be replaced and their anchoring points mustalso be checked.Only use seat belts which have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Do not make any modifications to the seatbelts. This can lead to unintended activationof the ETDs or to their failure to activate whennecessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Correct use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when usedproperly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, asthat could result in serious injuries in theevent of an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat beltat all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, driver's side kneebag, front-passenger front air bag, sideimpact air bags, pelvis air bags, windowcurtain air bags for the side windows),Emergency Tensioning Devices, seat beltforce limiters, and front seat knee bolsters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to properly beltedoccupants in certain frontal (front air bags,driver's side knee bag, and ETDs) and side(side impact air bags, pelvis air bags,window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impactswhich exceed preset deploymentthresholds.RNever wear the shoulder belt under yourarm, across your neck or off your shoulder.

In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder. It should nottouch the neck. Never pass the shoulderportion of the seat belt under your arm.RPosition the lap belt as low as possible onyour hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across yourabdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid orbreakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fittedsnugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than oneperson at a time. Do not fasten a seat beltaround a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In acrash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use alap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that isas upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to makesure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

keep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infantrestraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 94).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide:.

X Without twisting it, guide the shouldersection of the seat belt across the middleof your shoulder and the lap section acrossyour pelvis.

X Engage belt tongue; in buckle=.X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to theappropriate height (Y page 55).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecurely fasten child restraint systems in thevehicle. For further information on specialseat belt retractors, see (Y page 59).Formore information about releasing the seatbelt with release button?, see "Releasingseat belts" (Y page 55).

Seat belt adjustmentThe seat-belt adjustment function adjusts thedriver's and front-passenger seat belt to theupper body of the occupants.

54 Occupant safetySafety

The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Ryou engage the belt tongue in the beltbuckle and you then turn the SmartKey toposition 2 in the ignition lock.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Moreinformation about PRE-SAFE® can be foundin the "PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)" section (Y page 50).

Belt height adjustmentYou can adjust the seat belt height on thedriver's seat and the front-passenger seat.

Adjust the height so that the upper part of theseat belt is routed across the center of yourshoulder.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.The belt sash guide engages in variouspositions.

X To lower: press and hold belt sash guiderelease:.

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.X Release belt sash guide release: andmake sure that the belt sash guide hasengaged.

Releasing seat beltsX Press release button?(Y page 54) andguide belt tongue; back towards beltsash guide:.

! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tongue

will be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt.Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfilltheir protective function and must bereplaced. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerRegardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already beenfastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up for six seconds each time the engineis started. It then goes out if the driver andthe front passenger have fastened their seatbelts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. The warning tone goes outafter approximately six seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.If after six seconds the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed, the 7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up:Runtil the driver's or front passenger's seatbelt is fastenedRif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) isexceeded, a warning tone also sounds withincreasing intensity for a maximum of60 seconds or until the driver or front-passenger seat belt has been fastened.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten theirseat belt while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases after 60 seconds ifdriver or front-passenger seat belt has stillnot been fastened. The 7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remainsilluminated.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated and the7 seat

Occupant safety 55

Safety

Z

belt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passengerhave fastened their seat belts.

orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the 7 seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belts" (Y page 245).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltforce limitersThe front seat belts and the outer seat beltsin the rear are equipped with belt tensionersand belt force limiters.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.When triggered, seat belt force limiters helpto reduce the peak force exerted by the seatbelt on the vehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters for the front seatsare synchronized with the front air bags.These take on a part of the deceleration force.They take on a part of the deceleration force,resulting in the force exerted on the occupantbeing distributed over a greater area.The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe ignition is switched on.Rthe restraint systems are operational; see"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 39).Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle oneach of the lap-shoulder belts in the front.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied andthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe front-passenger side

The ETDs on the outside seats in the rearcompartment are triggered independently ofthe lock status of the seat belts.The belt tensioners are triggered dependingon the type and severity of an accident, if:Rin the event of a head-on or rear-endcollision, the vehicle decelerates oraccelerates rapidly in a longitudinaldirection during the initial stages of theimpactRin the event of a side impact, the vehicledecelerates or accelerates rapidly in alateral direction on the side opposite theimpact

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.

G WARNINGPyrotechnic ETDs that were activatedmust bereplaced.For your safety, when disposing of thepyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safetyinstructions. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belttongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the EmergencyTensioning Device could be triggered in theevent of an accident.

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems

Important safety notesWe recommend that all infants and childrenbe properly secured in an infant or childrestraint system at all times while the vehicleis in motion.

56 Children in the vehicleSafety

The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in all 50states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.territories and all Canadian provinces.Infants and childrenmust always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. All infant orchild restraint systemsmust complywith U.S.Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards 213 and 210.2.An information label on the child restraintsystem indicates whether it meets thesestandards. This information is also providedin the installation instructions supplied withthe child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe all warning signs in the vehicleinterior and on the infant or child restraint.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat

recommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate the frontpassenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the front passenger seat.RFor children larger than the typical12-month-old child, the front passengerfront air bag may or may not be activated.Always make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing childrestraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 4 5 indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 5 indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 4 5 indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If the4 5 indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on the

Children in the vehicle 57

Safety

Z

front passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle's seat belt according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seatmay be necessary to achieve proper seat beltpositioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) untilthey reach a height where a lap-shoulder beltfits properly without a booster.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:X Secure the infant or child with anappropriate infant or child restraint

recommended for the child's age andweight.

X Make sure that the infant or child isproperly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured throughexcessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accidentwithvehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

58 Children in the vehicleSafety

Special seat belt retractorAll seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat beltretractor ensures that the seat belt will notslacken once the child restraint system hasbeen secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seatbelt retractor.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the beltbuckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seatbelt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Press the seat belt release button andguide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.

G WARNINGNever release the seat belt buckle while thevehicle is inmotion, since the special seat beltretractor will be deactivated.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsin the rear

G WARNINGChildren that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position shoulder belt across the chest andshoulder, not face or neck.

A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height wherea lap/shoulder belt fits properly without abooster.Install the child restraint system inaccordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.Attach the child restraint system to bothsecuring rings.An incorrectly installed child restraint systemcould come loose during an accident andseriously or even fatally injure the child.Child restraint systems or child seat securingrings that are malfunctioning or damaged asthe result of a collision must be replaced.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. Securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems areinstalled on the left and right of the rear seats.Secure non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems using the vehicle's seat beltsystem. When installing child restraintsystems, you must observe themanufacturer's installation instructions.

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat beltcould otherwise be damaged.

Vehicles without rear-seat through-loading facility

Installation instructions: indicate theinstallation location of securing rings=.

Children in the vehicle 59

Safety

Z

X Pull protective caps; off securing rings= by pulling in the direction of the arrow.

Vehicles with rear-seat through-loading facilityX Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system. Comply with themanufacturer's instructions wheninstalling the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system.

Top Tether

G WARNINGAlways lock the rear seat backrests in theirupright position when the rear seats areoccupied by passengers. Lock the rear seatbackrests in their upright position beforeinstalling the Top Tether straps or when thecargo compartment is not in use. Make surethat rear seat backrests are secured properlyby pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.If the seat backrest is not locked properly, theseat backrest could fold forward. The childrestraint system is no longer supportedproperly or held in position and can no longerfulfill its function. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries.

Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween a child restraint system, securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,and the rear seat. This helps reduce the riskof injury even further.The Top Tether anchorage points are locatedin the rear compartment behind the headrestraints.

X Move head restraint: upwards.X Fold up cover; of Top Tether anchorage=.

X Route Top Tether beltA under headrestraint:between the twohead restraintbars.

X Hook Top Tether hook? into Top Tetheranchorage=.

X Make sure that Top Tether beltA is nottwisted.

X Fold down cover; of Top Tetheranchorage=.

X Move head restraint: back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 98). Makesure that you do not interfere with thecorrect routing of Top Tether beltA.

X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system with Top Tether. Complywith the manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so. Make sure thatTop Tether beltA is tight.

60 Children in the vehicleSafety

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured throughexcessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accidentwithvehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in seriousinjuries or an accident. Therefore, whenchildren ride in the rear always secure the reardoors with the child-proof locks.

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When the

vehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.

X To activate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow:.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow;.

Override feature for the rear sidewindows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

X To activate/deactivate: press button;.If indicator lamp: is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in thedriver's door. If indicator lamp: is off,

Children in the vehicle 61

Safety

Z

operation is possible using the switches inthe rear compartment.

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems overviewIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)RBAS (Brake Assist System)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)REBD (Electronic Brake force Distribution)RADAPTIVE BRAKERPRE-SAFE® Brake

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safetysystems can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.Driving safety systems are merely aidsdesigned to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when thereis adequate contact between the tires andthe road surface. Please pay specialattention to the notes on tires,recommended minimum tire tread depths,etc. (Y page 318).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 62).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.Additionally, further driving safety systemsare deactivated. There is an increased dangerof skidding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checkedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 247) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 219).ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surfaceconditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,even if you only brake gently.The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It goes out when the engine isrunning.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions, and

62 Driving safety systemsSafety

functions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 62).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, thus shortening the stopping distance.X Keep the brake pedal depressed firmly untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist System Plus)i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 62).

BAS PLUS is only available in vehiclesequipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance inhazardous situations at speeds greater than4 mph (7 km/h) and uses radar sensortechnology to assess the traffic situation.With the help of the radar sensor system, BASPLUS can detect obstacles that are in thepath of your vehicle for an extended period oftime.At speeds up to 40mph (70 km/h), BAS PLUSmay also detect stationary obstacles, forexample, stopped or parked vehicles.

To prevent a front-end collision, BAS PLUScalculates the brake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionAt a speed greater than 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake sharply,BAS PLUS automatically raises the brakepressure to a value adapted to the trafficsituation.At a speed less than 20 mph (30 km/h): ifyou depress the brake, BAS PLUS isactivated. Braking is performed as late aspossible.If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) areactivated simultaneously.X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakesfunction as usual, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-endcollision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.

For BAS PLUS to assist you when driving, theradar sensor system must be:Rbe switched on (Y page 213)Roperational (Y page 233)If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,BAS PLUS will not be available. The brakesystem is still available with complete brakeboosting effect and BAS.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations. BASPLUS cannot intervene in these cases. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

Driving safety systems 63

Safety

Z

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthe possibility of strong radar reflections,for example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of anaccident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removing,altering or tampering with the device willvoid any warranties, and is not permittedby the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, oruse the device in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usethe device in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 62).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, furtherdriving safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles without 4MATIC: switch theignition off when:Rthe parking brake is being tested using adynamometerRthe vehicle is being towed with the frontaxle raised

Application of the brakes by ESP® mayotherwise destroy the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: switch off theignition when the parking brake is beingtested on a brake dynamometer.Application of the brakes by ESP® mayotherwise destroy the brake system.

64 Driving safety systemsSafety

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function orperformance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. Before youoperate the vehicle on such adynamometer, please consult a qualifiedworkshop. You could otherwise damagethe drive train or the brake system.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the åwarning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 249) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 219).If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. If necessary, the engine output is alsomodified to keep the vehicle on the desiredcourse within physical limits. ESP® assiststhe driver when pulling away on wet orslippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize thevehicle during braking.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under anycircumstances.

X only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary when pulling away.

X adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions.

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 62).

Traction control is part of ESP®.

Traction control brakes the drive wheelsindividually if they spin. This enables you topull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,for example if the road surface is slippery onone side. On vehicles with 4MATIC, moredrive torque is also transferred to the wheelor wheels with traction.Traction control remains active if youdeactivate ESP®.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptAMG vehicles)i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 62).

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

X To deactivate:(Y page 209) .The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To activate:(Y page 209).The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.If ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

Driving safety systems 65

Safety

Z

If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited andthe drive wheels can spin. The spinning ofthewheels results in a cutting action, whichprovides better grip.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMGvehicles)

Activating/deactivating SPORT handlingmodeG WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding andaccidents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in thesituations described in the following.

X To activate: briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.The SPORT handling modeSPORT handling mode messageappears in the multifunction display.SPORT handling mode is designed fordriving on designated roads when thevehicle's own oversteering andundersteering characteristics are desired.Driving in SPORT handling mode requiresan extremely qualified and experienceddriver who is able to copewith these criticaldriving conditions.

X To deactivate: briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.It may be best to activate SPORT handlingmode in the following situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelIf SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.Rthe engine's torque is restricted only to alimited degree and the drive wheels canspin. The spinning of the wheels results ina cutting action, which provides better grip.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

66 Driving safety systemsSafety

X To deactivate: press button: until theå ESP® OFF warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster.The ÷OFFOFF message appears in themultifunction display.Deactivate ESP® when driving ondesignated roads when the vehicle's ownoversteering and understeeringcharacteristics are desired. Driving withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver who is able to cope withthese critical driving conditions.

X To activate: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ONONmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.If ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelIf you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited andthe drive wheels are able to spin. The

spinning of the wheels results in a cuttingaction, which provides better grip.Rtraction control is still activated.RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available,nor is it activated if you brake firmly andESP® intervenes.RESP® still provides support when you brakefirmly.

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 62).

G WARNINGIf EBD hasmalfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 247) as well asdisplay messages (Y page 220).EBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. Inaddition to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 178) and hill start assist(Y page 144). For further information, see"Driving tips" (Y page 162).

Driving safety systems 67

Safety

Z

PRE-SAFE® Brakei Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 62).

PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a collision with a vehicle ahead orreduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,you will be warned visually and acousticallyas well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®Brake cannot prevent a collision without yourintervention.Starting at a speed of around4 mph (7 km/h), this function warns you ifyou very quickly approach a vehicle in front.An intermittent warning tone will then soundand the· distance warning lamp will lightup in the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately in order to increase thedistance from the vehicle in front.

orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

From a speed of approximately4 mph (7 km/h), if the driver and frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts,PRE-SAFE® Brake can brake the vehicleautomatically at speeds up to approximately124 mph (200 km/h).Due to the nature of the system, particularlycomplicated driving conditions may causeunnecessary warnings or the unnecessaryintervention of PRE-SAFE® Brake.You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal furtherRactivating kickdownRreleasing the brake pedal.

The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer any danger of a rear-endcollision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

With the help of the radar sensor system,PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles thatare in front of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.At speeds up to approximately40 mph (70 km/h), PRE-SAFE® Brake canalso detect stationary obstacles such asstopped or parked vehicles.If you approach an obstacle and PRE-SAFE®Brake detects a risk of a collision, the systemwill alert you both visually and acoustically. Ifyou do not brake or take evasive action, thesystemwill warn you by automatically brakingthe vehicle gently. If there is an increased riskof collision, preventive passenger protectionmeasures (PRE-SAFE®) are activated(Y page 50). If the risk of collision remainsand you do not brake, take evasive action oraccelerate significantly, the vehicle mayperform automatic emergency braking.Automatic emergency braking is notperformed until immediately prior to anaccident that can no longer be avoided.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake yourvehicle by a partial application of the brakesif a danger of collision is detected. There maybe a collision unless you also brake.Automatic emergency braking cannot preventa collision. There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex trafficconditions.

68 Driving safety systemsSafety

In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthe possibility of strong radar reflections,for example in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all criticalsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent acollision, you must apply the brakes yourself.X To activate/deactivate: activate ordeactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 210).When PRE-SAFE® Brake is activated, theÄ symbol appears in the multifunction

display, as long as the HOLD function isdeactivated (Y page 178).On vehicles with Parking Guidance, theÄ symbol is displayed when position Pis engaged or you are driving faster than22 mph (35 km/h).

If PRE-SAFE® Brake is to aid you, the radarsensor system must:Rbe switched on (Y page 213)Roperational (Y page 233)Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removing,altering or tampering with the device willvoid any warranties, and is not permittedby the FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, oruse the device in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usethe device in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Driving safety systems 69

Safety

Z

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerThe immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.X To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activatewith KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodThe alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that has triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergencysystem (USA only) or the TELEAID system(Canada only) initiates a call to theCustomer Assistance Centerautomatically. The Tele Aid system willinitiate the call provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aidservice.Rthe Tele Aid service has been activatedproperly.Rthe requiredmobile phone, power supplyand GPS are available.

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarmsystem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

X To stop the alarm using the SmartKey:insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the% or& button on theSmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

70 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on thedashboard. The SmartKey must be insidethe vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

Theft deterrent locking system 71

Safety

Z

72

Useful information .............................. 74SmartKey ............................................. 74Doors .................................................... 80Trunk .................................................... 83Side windows ...................................... 86Sliding sunroof .................................... 89

73

Opening/closing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey hasbeen removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become very

hot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNUNGIf a key ring is too heavy or too large, theweight acting on the SmartKey could cause itto turn in the ignition lock or catch on thesteering wheel. This could cause the engineto be switched off suddenly. You could losecontrol of the vehicle and cause an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large key rings tothe SmartKey that is inserted in the ignition.

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

74 SmartKeyOp

ening/closing

The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.RDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key togetherwith:- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey

- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil

- with metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the SmartKey'sfunctionality.

Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.

SmartKey functionsThe SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe fuel filler flap

: & To lock the vehicle; F To unlock the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicle

When unlocking, the turn signals flash once.When locking, they flash three times.When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 212).You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audible

signal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 213).X To unlock centrally: press the%button.

If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system is armedagain.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be startedby any of the vehicle occupants if there is aKEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking and unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GO with those of aconventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicleby using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lockit using the& button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the SmartKey and thecorresponding door handle must not begreater than 3 ft (1 m).KEYLESS-GO checks whether a validSmartKey is in the vehicle by periodicallyestablishing a radio connection between thevehicle and the SmartKey. This happens:Rwhen the external door handles aretouchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion

SmartKey 75

Opening/closing

Z

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensorsurface:.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for anextended period.

Further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 88).If you pull on the handle of the trunk lid, onlythe trunk of the vehicle is unlocked.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans that only the driver's doorand the fuel filler flap are unlocked when thevehicle is unlocked. This is useful if youfrequently travel on your own.X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lamp(Y page 77) flashes twice.

i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of thevehicle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the%button twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed asfollows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the innersurface of the door handle on the front-passenger door or the rear door.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles(Y page 75).

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid, theanti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 70).There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X To turn the alarm off with theSmartKey: press the% or& buttonon the SmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX To deactivate the alarm with KEYLESS-GO: press the Start/Stop button in the

76 SmartKeyOp

ening/closing

ignition lock. The SmartKey must be in thevehicle.

orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey must be outside thevehicle.

If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notesMercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic substances.Swallowing batteries can lead to serioushealth issues or death.Keep batteries out of the reach of children.Seek medical attention immediately if abattery is swallowed.

G WARNINGThe SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Observegovernment disposal guidelines. Californiaresidents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.If battery check lamp: does not light upbriefly during the test, the battery isdischarged.

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

X Change the battery (Y page 77).

i You can get a battery at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 76).

SmartKey 77

Opening/closing

Z

X Pressmechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow untilbattery compartment cover: opens. Donot hold battery compartment cover:closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positiveterminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree from lint, grease and all other forms ofcontamination.

X Insert the front tabs of batterycompartment cover: into the housingfirst and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into theSmartKey.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

78 SmartKeyOp

ening/closing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Try again to lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote controlfunction of the SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at thedriver's door handle from close range and press the% or& button.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it ifnecessary (Y page 77).

X Lock (Y page 82) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock (Y page 82) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the% /& button.

There is a malfunction with KEYLESS-GO.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey. Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's doorhandle from close range and press the% /& button.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 77) and replace it ifnecessary (Y page 77).

X Lock (Y page 82) or unlock (Y page 82) the vehicle usingthe mechanical key.

You have lost aSmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey 79

Opening/closing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 306).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 310).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The steering lock is mechanically blocked.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.Whiledoing this, turn the steering wheel in both directions.

The engine cannot bestarted using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey is inthe vehicle.

A door is open. Therefore, the SmartKey cannot be detected aseasily.X Close the door and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey has

been removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.

80 DoorsOp

ening/closing

Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe insideYou can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only openthe rear doors from inside the vehicle if theyare not secured by the child-proof locks(Y page 61).Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.If the vehicle was previously locked with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening thevehicle from the inside will activate the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 70).

X Pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside.

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.The central locking/unlocking button doesnot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked. You can only openthe rear doors from inside the vehicle if theyare not secured by the child-proof locks(Y page 61).Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.If the vehicle was previously locked with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening thevehicle from the inside will activate the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 70).If the vehicle has been locked using thelocking button for the central locking, or hasbeen locked automatically, and a door isopened from the inside:Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it hadpreviously been fully unlockedRonly the door which has been opened formthe inside is unlocked if only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked

If the vehicle has been locked centrally withthe SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it is notunlocked when the release button for thecentral locking is used.

Doors 81

Opening/closing

Z

Automatic locking featureThe vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the vehicle'swheels are turning at a speed in excess of9 mph (15 km/h).You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

X To disarm: press and hold button: forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To arm: press and hold button; for aboutfive seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 213).

Unlocking the driver's door(mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 70).X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 76).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door, the reardoors and the trunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 81).X Check whether the locking knobs on thefront-passenger door and the rear doorsare still visible. Press down the lockingknobs manually, if necessary (Y page 81).

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 76).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

82 DoorsOp

ening/closing

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as faras it will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notesDo not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extremeheat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident withvehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey has

been removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

G WARNINGMake sure the trunk lid is closed when theengine is running and while driving. Amongother dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)gases may enter the vehicle interior resultingin unconsciousness and death.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 358).

The trunk lid can be:Ropened and closed manually from outsideRopened automatically from outsideRopened automatically from insideRlocked separatelyRunlocked with the mechanical keyRopened with the emergency release button

Trunk 83

Opening/closing

Z

Opening/closing from outside

OpeningX Press the% button on the SmartKey.

X Pull handle:.X Raise the trunk lid.

Closing

G WARNINGTo prevent possible personal injury, alwayskeep hands and fingers away from the trunkopening when closing the trunk lid. Beespecially careful when small children arearound.

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:.X If necessary, lock the vehicle withthe& button on the SmartKey(Y page 75) or with KEYLESS-GO(Y page 75).i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thetrunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked andthen opens again.

Opening automatically from theoutside

Important safety notes

G WARNINGMake sure the trunk lid is closed when theengine is running and while driving. Amongother dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)gases may enter the vehicle interior resultingin unconsciousness and death.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 358).

OpeningYou can open the trunk lid automaticallyusing the SmartKey or the handle in the trunklid.X Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the trunk lid opens.

orX If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.

Opening automatically from theinside

G WARNINGMake sure the trunk lid is closed when theengine is running and while driving. Amongother dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)gases may enter the vehicle interior resultingin unconsciousness and death.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 358).

84 TrunkOp

ening/closing

You can open the trunk lid from the driver'sseat when the vehicle is stationary andunlocked.

X To open: press the upper section of remoteoperating switch: for the trunk lid untilthe trunk lid opens.

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 76).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as the stop.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise fromposition1 to position2.

X Remove the mechanical key.X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered (Y page 70).X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 76).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as the stop.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwisefrom position1 as far as it will go toposition2.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1 and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Trunk emergency releaseYou can open the trunk lid from inside thevehicle with the emergency release button.

Trunk 85

Opening/closing

Z

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked and openedwith the trunk lid emergency release whenthe vehicle is stationary or while driving.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRemergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

The trunk lid emergency release does notopen the trunk lid if the battery isdisconnected or discharged.

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the door windows,make sure that there is no danger of anyonebeing harmed by the opening/closingprocedure.The door windows are equipped withautomatic operation and the anti-entrapmentfeature. If in automatic mode a door windowencounters an obstruction that blocks itspath, the anti-entrapment featurewill stop thedoor window and open it slightly.The door windows operate differently whenthe switch is pulled. See the "Problems withdoor windows" section for details.The closing of the door windows can beimmediately halted by releasing the switch or,

if the switch was pulled past the resistancepoint and released, by either pressing orpulling the respective switch.If a door window encounters an obstructionthat blocks its path in a circumstance whereyou are closing the windows by pressing andholding the& button on the SmartKey orby pressing and holding the lock button(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outsidedoor handle, the anti-entrapment feature willnot operate.Activate the override switch when childrenare riding in the back seats of the vehicle. Thechildren may otherwise injure themselves,e.g. by becoming trapped in the door windowopening.

G WARNINGDo not keep any part of your body up againstthewindowpanewhen opening awindow. Thedownward motion of the pane may pull thatpart of your body down between the windowpane and the door frame and trap it there. Ifthere is a risk of entrapment, release theswitch and pull it to close the window.

Opening and closing the sidewindows

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear left

86 Side windowsOp

ening/closing

The switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding sidewindow.The switches on the driver's door takeprecedence.

i The side windows cannot be operatedfrom the rear when the override feature forthe side windows is activated (Y page 61).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.i If you press the switch beyond the pointof resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

Convenience openingYou can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functionssimultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroof or the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel and theroller sunblinds

i The convenience opening feature canonly be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the% button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or the

panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are in the desired position.

If the roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel are closed, theroller sunblinds are opened first.X Press and hold the% button again untilthe panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel is in the desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the% button.

Convenience closing

General notesWhen you lock the vehicle, you cansimultaneously:Rclose the side windowsRclose the sliding sunroof or the panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, you can then close theroller sunblinds.

G WARNINGWhen closing the door windows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel, make sure that there is nodanger of anyone being harmed by the closingprocedure.If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:RRelease the& button to stop the closingprocedure. To open, press and hold the% button. To continue the closingprocedure after making sure that there isno danger of anyone being harmed by theclosing procedure, press and hold the& button.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:RRelease the sensor surface on the outsidedoor handle to stop the closing procedure.RImmediately pull on the same outside doorhandle and hold firmly. The door windowsand the sliding sunroof or panorama roof

Side windows 87

Opening/closing

Z

with power tilt/sliding panel will open foras long as the door handle is held but thedoor is not opened.

Using the SmartKeyi The SmartKey must be close to thedriver's door handle.

X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver'sdoor handle.

X Press and hold the& button until theside windows and the sliding sunroof or thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel are fully closed.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Press and hold the& button again untilthe roller sunblinds of the panorama roofwith power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release the& button.

Using KEYLESS-GOThe KEYLESS-GO key must be outside thevehicle. All the doors must be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows and the

sliding sunroof or the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.i Make sure you only touch recessedsensor surface:.

X Make sure that all the sidewindows and thesliding sunroof or panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel are closed.

On vehicles with a panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel:X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle again until the roller sunblindsof the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel close.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsYou must reset each side window if a sidewindow can no longer be closed fully.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window iscompletely closed (Y page 86).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the sidewindow is completely closed (Y page 86).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remainsclosed after the button has been released,the side window has been reset correctly.If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

88 Side windowsOp

ening/closing

Problems with the side windowsProblem: a side window cannot be closedbecause it is blocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the window guide.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.Problem: a side window cannot be closedand you cannot see the cause.

G WARNINGClosing the sidewindowswith increased forceor without the anti-entrapment feature couldlead to serious or even fatal injury. Make surethat nobody can become trapped whenclosing the side windows.

If a side window is obstructed during closingand reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pullthe corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed with increasedforce.

If a side window is obstructed again duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pullthe corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

G WARNINGPulling and holding the switch to close thedoor window immediately after it had beenblocked two times will cause the door windowto close without the anti-entrapment featurefor as long as you hold the switch.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notesYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, the

term "sliding sunroof" refers to both types ofsliding sunroof.

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the sliding sunroof,make sure that there is no danger of anyonebeing harmed by the opening/closingprocedure.The sliding sunroof is equipped withautomatic operation and the anti-entrapmentfeature. If themovement of the sliding sunroofis blocked during the closing procedure, thesliding sunroof will stop and open slightly.The sliding sunroof operates differently whenthe sliding sunroof switch is pressed and held.See the "Problems with the sliding sunroof"section for more details.The opening/closing procedure of the slidingsunroof can be immediately halted byreleasing the sliding sunroof switch or, if thesliding sunroof switch was moved past theresistance point and released, by moving thesliding sunroof switch in any direction.

G WARNINGThe sliding sunroof is made out of glass. In theevent of an accident, the glass may shatter.This may result in an opening in the roof.In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearingtheir seat belts or not wearing them properlymay be thrown out of the opening. Such anopening also presents a potential for injury foroccupants wearing their seat belts properly,as entire body parts or portions of them mayprotrude from the passenger compartment.

! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is freeof snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctionsmay occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closedwhen you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can be

Sliding sunroof 89

Opening/closing

Z

damaged if water enters the vehicleinterior.

i Resonance noises can occur in additionto the usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Operating the sliding sunroof

Opening and closingi You can continue to operate the slidingsunroof after switching off the engine orremoving the SmartKey from the ignitionlock. This function remains active for fiveminutes or until you open a front door.

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in thecorresponding direction.i If you press the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

The automatic opening and raising featureis available only when the sliding sunroof isclosed.

The sun protection cover automatically opensalong with the sliding sunroof. You can openor close the sun protection cover manuallywhen the sliding sunroof is raised or closed.

ResettingReset the sliding sunroof if it does not movesmoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Raise the sliding sunroof fully at the rear(Y page 90).

X Keep the3 switch pressed for anothersecond.

X Make sure that the sliding sunroof can befully opened and closed again (Y page 90).

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed fully after resetting,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Operating the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lower

90 Sliding sunroofOp

ening/closing

The panorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel can only be operated when the rollersunblind is open.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in thecorresponding direction.i If you press the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.The automatic raising feature is availableonly when the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel is closed.

Operating the roller sunblind for thepanorama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel

General notesThe roller sunblinds shield the vehicle interiorfrom sunlight. The two roller sunblinds canonly be opened and closed together when thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelis closed.

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roller sunblinds,make sure that no one can be injured.The roller sunblinds have automatic operationand an anti-entrapment feature. If the rollersunblinds are blocked during the closingprocedure, the anti-entrapment feature stopsthe roller sunblinds and they open againslightly.The opening and closing of the rollersunblinds can be terminated immediately byreleasing the button. In automatic operation,press the button briefly in any direction tostop the roller sunblinds.

Opening/closing

Overhead control panel: To open; To open= To closeX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press or pull the3 switch in thecorresponding direction.i If you press the3 switch beyond thepoint of resistance, an automatic opening/closing process is started in thecorresponding direction. You can stopautomatic operation by operating theswitch again.

Resetting the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and the rollersunblindsReset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblinds if thepanorama roof with power tilt/sliding panelor the roller sunblinds do not move smoothly.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the3 switch to the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow; andhold it until the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel has opened about4 in(10 cm).

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=

Sliding sunroof 91

Opening/closing

Z

until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Press the3 switch to the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow; andhold it until the roller sunblinds haveopened about 4 in(10 cm).

X Pull the3 switch repeatedly to the pointof resistance in the direction of arrow=until the roller sunblinds are fully closed.

X Keep the3 switch pulled for anadditional second.

X Make sure that the panorama roof withpower tilt/sliding panel and the rollersunblinds can be fully opened and closedagain (Y page 90).

X If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

! If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind cannotbe fully opened or closed after resetting,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Problems with the sliding sunroofYour vehicle may be equipped with a slidingsunroof or a panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel. In the following section, theterm "sliding sunroof" refers to both types ofsliding sunroof.Problem: the sunroof cannot be closedand you cannot see the cause.

G WARNINGYou could be severely or even fatally injuredwhen closing the sliding sunroof withincreased closing force or if the anti-entrapment feature is deactivated. Make surethat nobody can become trapped whenclosing the sliding sunroof.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroofblocks, pull the3 switch in theoverhead control panel down to the pointof resistance and hold it until the slidingsunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closedwith increasedforce.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed againduring closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroofblocks, pull the3 switch in theoverhead control panel down to the pointof resistance and hold it until the slidingsunroof is closed.The sliding sunroof is closed without theanti-entrapment feature.

G WARNINGPressing and holding the sliding sunroofswitch to close the sliding sunroofimmediately after it had been blocked twotimes will cause the sliding sunroof to closewithout the anti-entrapment feature for aslong as you hold the switch.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of amalfunction, contact a qualified specialistworkshop.

92 Sliding sunroofOp

ening/closing

Useful information .............................. 94Correcting the driver's seat posi-tion ....................................................... 94Seats .................................................... 95Steering wheel .................................. 101Mirrors ............................................... 103Memory function .............................. 106

93

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Correcting the driver's seat position

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 95).

X Make sure that seat= is adjustedproperly.Manual and electrical seat adjustment(Y page 96)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 97)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bagas possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Ryou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.X Check whether the head restraint isadjusted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level bythe center of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 101).

X Make sure that steering wheel: isadjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel manually(Y page 102)Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 102)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in theinstrument cluster clearly.

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 52).

X Check whether you have fastened the seatbelt; properly (Y page 54).

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of yourshoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmirror and the exterior mirrors in such away that you have a good view of road andtraffic conditions (Y page 103).

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirror

94 Correcting the driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

settings with the memory function(Y page 106).

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe seats can still be adjusted when there isno key in the ignition lock. For this reason,children should never be left unsupervised inthe vehicle. They could otherwise becometrapped when adjusting the seat.

G WARNINGMake sure that the back of your head issupported at eye level by the central area ofthe head restraint. If your head is notsupported correctly by the head restraint, youcould suffer a severe neck injury in the eventof an accident. Never drive if the headrestraints are not engaged and set correctly.

G WARNINGIn order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol, all seat, head restraint, steeringwheel and rear view mirror adjustments, aswell as fastening of seat belts, must be donebefore setting the vehicle in motion.

G WARNINGDo not adjust the driver's seat while driving.Adjusting the seat while driving could causethe driver to lose control of the vehicle.Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. This could cause serious orfatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat beltsprovide the best restraint when the wearer isin a position that is as upright as possible andseat belts are properly positioned on thebody.

G WARNINGYour seat belt must be adjusted so that youcan correctly fasten your seat belt.Observe the following points:Radjust the seat backrest until your arms areslightly angled when holding the steeringwheel.Radjust the seat to a comfortable seatingposition that still allows you to reach theaccelerator/brake pedal safely. Theposition should be as far back as possiblewith the driver still able to operate thecontrols properly.Radjust the head restraint so that it is asclose to the head as possible and the centerof the head restraint supports the back ofthe head at eye level.Rnever place hands under the seat or nearany moving parts while a seat is beingadjusted.

Failure to do so could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.

Seats 95

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential forinjury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.Do not drive the vehicle without the seat headrestraints. Head restraints are intended tohelp reduce injuries during an accident.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulatingmaterials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

i The head restraints in the front seats areinstalled with the NECK-PRO system(Y page 50). For this reason, it is notpossible to remove the head restraintsfrom the front seats.Vehicles without the through-loadingfeature: the head restraints cannot beremoved from the rear compartment seats.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Further related subjects:RRear bench seat through-loading feature(Y page 262)

Adjusting the seats manually andelectrically

: Backrest angle; Seat height= Seat cushion angle? Seat fore-and-aft adjustment

i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seatwith an integrated head restraint. It istherefore not possible to set the height andangle of the head restraint.

i Adjust the seat cushion angle so that yourthighs are lightly supported.

Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentX Lift handle? and slide the seat forwardsor rearwards.

X Release lever? again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

Seat cushion angleX Turn handwheel= in the desired direction.

96 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the seats electricallyi Vehicles without Memory function: theseats can be adjusted within three minutesof a front door being opened.The time period starts over again if, withinthese three minutes, you:Ropen or close a front doorRinsert the SmartKey into the ignition lockor remove it from the ignition lockRswitch the ignition on or offIf the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock, the seats can be adjusted atany time.

Depending on the equipment, the seatadjustment buttons are either located on theside of the seat or on the door control panel.

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

: Seat cushion angle; Seat height= Seat fore-and-aft adjustment? Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 106).

i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seatfeaturing an integrated head restraint andthe head restraint adjustment button isdeactivated. It is therefore not possible toset the height and angle of the headrestraint.

Adjusting the head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually

Adjusting the head restraint height2

2 For vehicles without memory function only.

Seats 97

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: in thedirection of the arrow and push the headrestraint down to the desired position.

Adjusting the angle of the head restraints

X Push or pull the lower edge of the headrestraint in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the head restraintselectricallyX To adjust the head restraint height: slidethe switch for head restraint adjustment(Y page 97) up or down in the direction ofthe arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

G WARNINGWhen folding back the side cushions, neverreach between the side cushion and themounting post. You could otherwise betrapped.

X To adjust the side bolsters of the headrestraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster: into the desiredposition.

X To adjust the angle of the headrestraint: push or pull the head restraint inthe direction of arrow;.

Rear seat head restraints

G WARNINGFor safety reasons, always drive with the rearhead restraints in the upright position whenthe rear seats are occupied.Keep the area around head restraints clear ofarticles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct thefolding operation of the head restraints.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint in such a way that itis as close to the head as possible and thecenter of the head restraint supports the backof the head at eye level. This will reduce thepotential for injury to the head and neck in theevent of an accident or similar situation.With a rear seat occupied, make sure to movethe respective head restraint up from thelowest non-use position and have theoccupant adjust the head restraint properly.Do not drive the vehicle without the seat headrestraints installed when the rear seats areoccupied. Head restraints are intended tohelp reduce injuries during an accident.

98 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

Once the head restraint is fully lowered, pressrelease catch:.X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch: and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Installing/removing the rear seat headrestraints3

G WARNINGOccupants should only travel sitting on seatswhich have the head restraints installed. Thisreduces the risk of injury to occupants in theevent of an accident.

X Release the rear seat backrest and fold itslightly forwards (Y page 263).

X To remove: pull the head restraint up tothe stop.

X Press release catch: and pull the headrestraint out of the guides.

X To re-install: insert the head restraint sothat the notches on the bar are on the leftwhen viewed in the direction of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

X Fold back the rear seat backrest until itengages.

Adjusting the lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatsso as to provide optimum support for yourback.

X Move adjustment lever: in the directionof the arrow until the desired backrestcontour is achieved.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

3 Only for vehicles with the through-loading feature.

Seats 99

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

Adaptive backrest (AMG vehicle)You can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually so as to provideoptimum support for your back.

: To adjust the upper back support; To adjust the contour of the backrest in

the lumbar region= To adjust the lateral structure and support

of the seatX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

i Repeat the adjustment if the seat nolonger has the desired contour after acertain amount of time.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGRepeatedly setting the seat heating to level3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.The health of passengers that have limitedtemperature sensitivity or a limited ability toreact to excessively high temperatures maybe affected or they may even suffer burn-likeinjuries. Therefore, do not use seat heatinglevel 3 repeatedly.

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximatelyeight minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

100 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Problems with the seat heatingThe seat heating has switched offprematurely or cannot be switched on. Thevehicle's electrical system voltage is too lowbecause too many electrical consumers areswitched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Activating/deactivatingThe three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you haveselected.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired ventilation level is set.

i You can open the side windows and thesliding sunroof using the "Convenienceopening" feature (Y page 87). The seatventilation of the driver's seatautomatically switches to the highest level.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

Problems with the seat ventilationThe seat ventilation has switched offprematurely or cannot be switched on. Thevehicle's electrical system voltage is too lowbecause too many electrical consumers areswitched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDo not adjust the steeringwheel while driving.Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, ordriving without the steering wheel adjustmentfeature locked could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.The electrical steering wheel adjustmentfeature can be operated at any time.Therefore, do not leave children unattendedin the vehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. A child's unsupervised access to avehicle could result in an accident and/orserious personal injury.

Steering wheel 101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Adjusting the steering wheelmanually

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

Adjusting the steering wheelelectrically

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 102)RStoring settings (Y page 106)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGMake sure that nobody can become trappedwhen you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature.If there is a risk of someone becomingtrapped, stop the adjustment procedure. Tohalt the procedure:Rpress the steering column adjustmentbutton.Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons.

The steering column stops movingimmediately.Do not keep the memory function positionbutton pressed as this will start the memoryfunction and set the steering wheel and seatin motion.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle. They could open the driver's door andthereby unintentionally activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped.

G WARNINGLet the system complete the adjustmentprocedure before setting the vehicle inmotion. All steering wheel adjustment mustbe completed before setting the vehicle inmotion. Driving off with the steering wheelstill adjusting could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 214).

102 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door and KEYLESS-GO isin position 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey isin position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper endstop.

Position of the steering wheel fordrivingThe steering wheel is moved to the lastselected position when:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignitionlock.orRyou press the Start/Stop button once onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO.

When you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored when you switch off the ignition orwhen you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 106).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of theposition of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRYfeature is activated in the on-board computer.

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirrors reduce the size of theimage. Objects are actually closer than theyappear. You couldmisjudge the distance fromvehicles driving behind and cause anaccident, e.g. when changing lane. For thisreason, make sure of the actual distance fromthe vehicle driving behind by glancing overyour shoulder.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are automatically heatedafter starting the vehicle if the rear windowdefroster is switched on and the outsidetemperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

Mirrors 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-handexterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, orto the left or right until you have adjustedthe exterior mirror to the correct position.You should have a good overview of trafficconditions.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectricallyThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than9 mph (15 km/h), you can no longer fold inthe exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrorsThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.If the battery has been disconnected orcompletely discharged, the exterior mirrorsmust be reset. The exterior mirrors willotherwise not fold in when you select the"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in theon-board computer (Y page 214).X Make sure that the SmartKey is inposition 1 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button:.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 214):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from theoutside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out againautomatically as soon as you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

i If the exterior mirrors have been folded inmanually, they do not fold out.

104 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Exterior mirror out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically foldingexterior mirrors4: until you hear a clickand then the mirrors engage in position.(Y page 104)The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 103).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGIf incident light from headlamps is preventedfrom striking the sensor in the rear-viewmirror, for instance, by luggage piled too highin the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-glare function will not operate.Incident light could then blind you. This maydistract you from the traffic conditions and,as a result, you may cause an accident.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interiorlighting is switched on.

Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gearYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition.

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the drivingposition.

Using the memory buttonYou can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M?.

4 Canada only.

Mirrors 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

X Make sure that the SmartKey is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.

X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking positionsettingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exteriormirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGOnly use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary. You couldotherwise be distracted from the trafficconditions by the seat moving of its ownaccord, and as a result cause an accident.

With the memory function, you can store upto three different settings, e.g. for threedifferent people.The following settings are stored as a singlememory preset:Rposition of the seat, backrest and headrestraintRdriver's side: steering wheel positionRdriver's side: position of the exteriormirrors on the driver's and front-passengersides

X Adjust the seat (Y page 97).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 102) and the exteriormirrors(Y page 103).

X Briefly press the M memory button andthen press storage position button 1, 2 or3 within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selectedpreset position. A tone sounds when thesettings have been completed.

Calling up a stored setting! If you want to move the seat from the fullyreclined position to a stored seat position,first raise the backrest. The seat couldotherwise be damaged.

X Press and hold the relevant storageposition button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat,steering wheel and exterior mirrors are inthe stored position.

106 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

Memory function 107

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

108

Useful information ............................ 110Exterior lighting ................................ 110Interior lighting ................................. 116Replacing bulbs ................................. 117Windshield wipers ............................ 121

109

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Exterior lighting

Important safety notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you drive with the lightsswitched on even during the daytime. In somecountries, operation of the headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations.

Information about driving abroad

Conversion to symmetrical low beamSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When usingsymmetrical lights, the edge of the road is notlit as widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Conversion to asymmetrical low beamafter returningHave the headlamps converted back toasymmetrical low-beam headlamps at aqualified specialist workshop as soon aspossible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using the:Rlight switchRcombination switch (Y page 112)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 212)

Light switch

Operation

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lampCN Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog

lamps)If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKeyin position 0.

110 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGIf the light switch is set toà and it is foggy,snowing or there is poor visibility, the low-beam headlamps will not come onautomatically. This could endanger you andothers. In such situations turn the light switchto L.The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.

à is the preferred light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambientlight (exception: poor visibility due to weatherconditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you haveactivated the daytime running lampsfunction via the on-board computer, thedaytime running lamps or the low-beamheadlamps and parking lamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. Thedaytime running lamps function is required bylaw in Canada. It cannot therefore bedeactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in high ambient lightbrightness: if you turn the light switch

to T, you turn on the daytime runninglamps and parking lamps.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. To dothis, the daytime running lamps functionmustbe switched on using the on-board computer(Y page 212).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

i In the USA, the daytime running lamps aredeactivated upon delivery from the factory.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGIf the light switch is set toà and it is foggy,snowing or there is poor visibility, the low-beam headlamps will not come onautomatically. This could endanger you andothers. In such situations turn the light switchto L.The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.

Even if the light sensor does not detect thatis dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock and the lightswitch is set to the L position. This is aparticularly useful function in the event of rainand fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Exterior lighting 111

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Front fog lampsIn conditions where visibility is poor due tofog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improvevisibility as well as making it easier for otherroad users to see you. They can be operatedtogether with the parking lamps or togetherwith the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps.X To switch on the front fog lamps: turnthe SmartKey in the ignition lock to position2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps: pressthe N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Only vehicles with front fog lamps have thefog lamps function.

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofheavy fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessivelydischarged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always park

your vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn light switch to T.The green T indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle isilluminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it isin position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signals

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, left

112 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

X To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction ofarrow:.In theà position, the high-beamheadlamps are only switched on when it isdark and the engine is running.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beamheadlamps:move the combination switchback to its normal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployed.Rthe vehicle is slowed down rapidly from aspeed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a halt.

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on thecorresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warninglamps: press button:.

If the vehicle returns to a speed of over6mph (10 km/h) after a full application of thebrakes, the hazard warning lamps aredeactivated automatically.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function isoperated five timeswhile the lights are on andthe engine is running (Y page 121). When youswitch off the ignition, the automaticheadlamp cleaning system is reset andcounting is resumed from 0.

Exterior lighting 113

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Active light function

The active light function is a system thatmoves the headlamps according to thesteering movements of the front wheels. Inthis way, relevant areas remain illuminatedwhile driving. This allows you to recognizepedestrians, cyclists and animals.Active: when the lights are switched on.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves theillumination of the road over a wide angle inthe direction you are turning, enabling bettervisibility in tight bends, for example. Thecornering light function can only be activatedwhen the low-beam headlamps are switchedon.

Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turnsignal or turn the steering wheel.Rif you are driving at speeds between25 mph (40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel.

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turnsignals or turn the steering wheel to thestraight-ahead position.The cornering light function may remain lit fora short time, but is automatically switched offafter no more than three minutes.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

G WARNINGThe Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aidintended to support you while driving. Thedriver is and remains responsible for propervehicle lighting in accordance with theprevailing light, sight and traffic conditions.The system may be impaired or unavailablewhenRvisibility is poor, e.g. due to snow, rain, fog,or heavy sprayRthe optical sensor area of the windshield isdirty, fogged up, or covered by a sticker forexample

The system cannot recognize the followingroad users:RRoad users without a lighting system oftheir own, e.g. pedestriansRRoad users with dim lighting of their own,e.g. cyclistsRRoad users whose lighting is obstructed,e.g. road users behind a guardrailRIn some seldomcases, even road userswitha lighting system of their own may berecognized too late or not at all.

The automatic high-beamheadlampswill thennot be deactivated or it will be activated inspite of preceding or oncoming road users.

114 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

This could endanger you and/or others andcause an accident. Always pay close attentionto the traffic situation and switch off the highbeam manually if necessary.

You can use this function to set theheadlamps to change between low beam andhigh beam automatically. The systemrecognizes vehicles with their lights on, eitherapproaching from the opposite direction ortraveling in front of your vehicle, andconsequently switches the headlamps fromhigh beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on thedistance to the other vehicle. Once thesystem no longer detects any other vehicles,it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

X To activate: activate the AdaptiveHighbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 212).

X Turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:(Y page 112).If it is dark and the light sensor activatesthe low-beam headlamps, the _

indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.If you drive at speeds above approximately28 mph (45 km/h):the headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and noother road users have been detected:the high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you drive at speeds below approximately30 mph (45 km/h) or if other road usersare identified or if the roads are sufficientlyilluminated:the high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the instrument clusterstays on.

X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.

X Switch on the lights and drive off.The level of moisture diminishes,depending on the length of the journey andthe weather conditions (humidity andtemperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Exterior lighting 115

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: u Switches the rear interior lighting

on/off; | Switches the automatic interior

lighting control on/off= p Switches the right-hand front

reading lamp on/off? c Switches the front interior lighting

on/offA p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off

Rear-compartment overhead control panel: p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/off; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

Automatic interior lighting controlX To activate/deactivate: press the |button.When the automatic interior lightingcontrol is activated, the button is flush withthe overhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 213).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the front interior lighting on/off: press the c button.

X To switch the rear interior lighting on/off: press the u button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

116 Interior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You couldget an electric shock and be seriously or evenfatally injured if you touch the electriccontacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, neverremove the cover from Xenon bulbs.Do not change the Xenon bulbs yourself, buthave them replaced at a qualified workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs and lamps can become very hot. Forthis reason, allow them to cool down beforechanging them. Otherwise, you could burnyourself when you touch them.

Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.Otherwise, they could, for example, damagethe bulbs and injure themselves.Never use a bulb which has been dropped.Such a bulb may explode and injure you.Halogen bulbs are pressurized and couldexplode when you change them, especially ifthey are very hot. You should therefore weareye protection and gloves when you arechanging them.

There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 117). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs,consult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Even minor contaminationcan burn into the glass surface and reducethe service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the bulbwhen installing.Only use bulbs of the correct type.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb typesYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Replacing bulbs 117

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Halogen headlamps: Parking lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W

Bi-Xenon headlamps: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Tail lamp: Backup lamp: P 21 W; Brake lamp: P 21 W= Brake lamp/parking lamp: P 21 W

Changing the front bulbs

Low-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

High-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.

118 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Parking lamps/standing lamps(halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Pull out bulb holder;.X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder;.X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Cornering light function (Bi-Xenonheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Turn bulb holder; counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder;.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;.X Insert bulb holder; into the lamp and turnit clockwise.

X Align housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Changing the rear bulbs

Opening and closing the side trimpanelsYoumust open the side trim panel in the trunkand remove the first-aid kit before you canchange the bulbs in the tail lamps.

Replacing bulbs 119

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Right-hand side trim panel

Left-hand side trim panel (vehicles with a soundsystem)X To open: turn rotary catch: 90° in thedirection of the arrow and remove side trimpanel;.

X To close: insert side trim panel; and turnrotary catch: 90° in the oppositedirection to the arrow.

Left-hand side trim panel (vehicles without a soundsystem)

X To open: loosen side trim panel: at thetop and fold it down in the direction of thearrow.

X To close: insert side panel :.

Tail lampX Switch off the lights.X Open the trunk.X Open the side trim panel (Y page 119).

X Remove the tail lamp connectorX Simultaneously press retaining lugs: inthe direction of the arrow and slightly pullout the bulb holder with the bulbs.

X Remove the connector for LED lightfunctions from the top of the bulb holder.

X Pull the bulb holder out with the bulbs.

: Backup lamp; Brake lamp= Parking lamp/brake lamp

120 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Press the respective bulb:,; or= backand turn it counter-clockwise to remove itfrom the bulb holder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise.

X Reinsert the connector for LED lightfunctions in the bulb holder.

X Insert the bulb holder again and lock it inplace.

X Insert the tail lamp connector.X Close the side trim panel (Y page 119).

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off

G WARNINGThe windshield will not longer be wipedproperly if the wiper blades are worn. Thiscould prevent you from observing the trafficconditions, thereby causing an accident.Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideallyin spring and fall.

! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wipers off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low5

3 Å Intermittent wipe, high6

4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/ î To wipe the

windshield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to thecorresponding position.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automaticallyaccording to the intensity of the rain. Inthe Å position, the rain sensor is moresensitive than in the Ä position, causingthe windshield wipers to wipe morefrequently.

5 Rain sensor set to low sensitivity.6 Rain sensor set to high sensitivity.

Windshield wipers 121

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFor safety reasons, switch off the windshieldwipers and remove the SmartKey from theignition lock before changing thewiper blades(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: make sure thatthe on-board electronics are in state 0).Otherwise, thewipermotor could be switchedon suddenly and cause injury.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from thewindshield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

Changing the windshield wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock or turn it to position 0 (KEYLESS-GO).

X Fold the wiper arm away from thewindshield until it engages.

X Firmly press release knob: and pull thewiper blade upwards from the wiper arm inthe direction of the arrow.

Installing the wiper bladesX Position the newwiper blade in the retaineron the wiper arm and slide it into place inthe opposite direction to the arrow.The wiper blade audibly engages.

X Make sure that wiper blade is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto thewindshield.

Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers are obstructedLeaves or snow, for example, may beobstructing the windshield wiper movement.The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stopbutton and open the driver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers are inoperativeThe windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.

122 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

X Select another wiper speed on thecombination switch.

X Have the windshield wipers checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

The spray nozzles are misalignedThe windshield washer fluid from the spraynozzles no longer hits the center of thewindshield. The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at aqualified specialist workshop.

Windshield wipers 123

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

124

Useful information ............................ 126Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 126Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 130Setting the air vents ......................... 135

125

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows couldotherwise fog up. This could prevent you fromobserving the traffic conditions, therebycausing an accident.

G WARNINGSevere conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)may require replacement of the filter beforeits scheduled replacement interval. A cloggedfilter will reduce the air volume to the interiorand the windows could fog up, impairingvisibility and endangering you and others.Have a clogged filter replaced as soon aspossible at a qualified specialist workshop.

Climate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances out of the air.Climate control is only operational when theengine is running. The system only worksoptimally when the side windows and the roofare closed.The residual heat function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 135).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using theconvenience opening feature (Y page 87).This will speed up the cooling process andthe desired vehicle interior temperaturewill be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust, and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. Forthis reason, you should always observe theinterval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet.Since the replacement interval depends onenvironmental conditions, e.g. heavy airpollution, the interval may be shorter thanstated in the Maintenance Booklet.

i It is It is possible that the dehumidificationfunction of the climate control system maybe activated automatically an hour after thekey has been removed. The vehicle is thenventilated for 30 minutes.

126 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone climate control

Canada only: Setting the temperature, left (Y page 132); Defrosting the windshield (Y page 133)= Switching the ZONE function on/off (Y page 133)? Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 130)A Switching the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)B Setting the temperature, right (Y page 132)C Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Setting the air distribution (Y page 132)E Increasing the airflow (Y page 133)F Reducing the airflow (Y page 133)G Switching climate control on/off (Y page 130)H Setting climate control to automatic mode (Y page 131)

Overview of climate control systems 127

Climatecontrol

Z

USA only: Setting the temperature, left (Y page 132); Defrosting the windshield (Y page 133)= Switching the maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 134)? Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 130)A Switching the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)B Setting the temperature, right (Y page 132)C Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Setting the air distribution (Y page 132)E Increasing the airflow (Y page 133)F Reducing the airflow (Y page 133)G Switching climate control on/off (Y page 130)H Setting climate control to automatic mode (Y page 131)

Notes on using automatic climatecontrolThe following contains notes andrecommendations on optimum use ofautomatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and¿ buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "defrosting" function brieflyuntil the windshield is clear again.ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly,e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odors

or when in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt thetemperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side as well. Theindicator lamp in theá button goes out.

128 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for 3-zone automatic climate control

Canada onlyFront control panel

: Setting the temperature, left (Y page 132); Defrosting the windshield (Y page 133)= Activating/deactivating the residual heat function (Y page 135)? Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 130)A Switching the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 134)B Setting the temperature, right (Y page 132)C Switching the ZONE function on/off (Y page 133)D Switching climate control on/off (Y page 130)E Setting the air distribution (Y page 132)F Increasing the airflow (Y page 133)G Reducing the airflow (Y page 133)H Setting the climate mode (Y page 131)I Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)J Setting climate control to automatic mode (Y page 131)

Rear control panelK Increasing the airflow (Y page 133)L Reducing the airflow (Y page 133)M DisplayN Reducing the temperature (Y page 132)O Increasing the temperature (Y page 132)

Overview of climate control systems 129

Climatecontrol

Z

Notes on using automatic climatecontrolThe following contains instructions andrecommendations to enable you to get themost out of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and¿ buttons light up.RIn automatic mode, you can also use theñ button to set a climate mode(FOCUS/MEDIUM/DIFFUSE). TheMEDIUM level is recommended.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "defrosting" function brieflyuntil the windshield is clear again.ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly,e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odorsor when in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt thetemperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side and the rearcompartment as well. The indicator lamp intheá button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if you wantto heat or ventilate the vehicle interiorwhen the ignition is switched off. The"residual heat" function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off.

Operating the climate controlsystems

Activating/deactivating climatecontrol

Points to observe before use

G WARNINGWhen the climate control system isdeactivated, the outside air supply andcirculation are also deactivated. Only choosethis setting for a short time. Otherwise the

windows could fog up, impairing visibility andendangering you and others.

i Switch on climate control primarily usingtheà button (Y page 131).

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To deactivate: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

Points to observe before use

G WARNINGIf you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. This may prevent you fromobserving the traffic conditions, therebycausing an accident.

The cooling with air dehumidification functionis only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled anddehumidified according to the temperatureselected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is amalfunction.

130 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

i The cooling with air dehumidificationfunction uses refrigerant R134a. Thiscoolant does not containchlorofluorocarbons, and therefore doesnot damage the ozone layer.

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the¿ button.The indicator lamp in the¿ button goesout. The cooling with air dehumidificationfunction has a delayed switch-off feature.

Problems with the cooling with airdehumidification functionWhen you press the¿ button, theindicator lamp in the button flashes threetimes or remains off. You can no longer switchon the cooling with air dehumidificationfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

G WARNINGIf you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Window fogging may impairvisibility and endanger you and others.

In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates thetemperature of the dispensed air, the airflowand the air distribution.Automatic mode will achieve optimaloperation if cooling with air dehumidificationis also activated. If desired, cooling with airdehumidification can be deactivated.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

i 3-zone automatic climate control: whenautomatic mode is activated, you canselect a climate mode (Y page 131).

X To select manually: press the_button.

orX Press theK orI button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic air distribution and airfloware deactivated.

Adjusting the climate mode settingsThis function is only available with 3-zoneautomatic climate control.You can select the following climate modesettings in automatic mode:FOCUS high airflow that is set slightly

coolerMEDIUM medium airflow, standard settingDIFFUSE low airflow that is set slightly

warmer and with less draftX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press theà button.X Press theñ button repeatedly until thedesired climate mode appears in thedisplay.

Operating the climate control systems 131

Climatecontrol

Z

Setting the temperature

Climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X To increase/reduce: turn control: orB clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 127).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

3-zone automatic climate control

Automatic climate control zones

You can select different temperature settingsfor the driver's and front-passenger sides aswell as for the rear compartment.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe front: turn controls: andBclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 129).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the frontcontrol panel: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.

X Turn control: clockwise or counter-clockwise (Y page 129).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

X To increase/reduce the temperature inthe rear compartment using the rearcontrol panel: press the9 or:button on the rear control panel.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

i If you leave the vehicle parked for longerthan 30 minutes, the temperature settingfor the rear compartment then switchesback to 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distribution

Air distribution settingsP Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs the airflow through the

footwell air ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the

defroster, center and side air vents7

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

_ Directs the airflow through thedefroster vents, the center and side airvents as well as the footwell airvents7

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. The side air vents can only beclosed when the controls on the side airvents are turned downwards.

7 Canada only.

132 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

AdjustingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout. Automatic control is deactivated andthe air distribution is controlled accordingto the selected setting.

Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X To increase/reduce: press theK orI button.i You can use automatic climate control toset the airflow in the rear compartmentseparately.

Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available in vehicles forCanada.X To activate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger side.3-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isnot adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment.

When the buttons for temperature, airflow orair distribution are activated, the temperaturesetting for the driver's side is not adopted forthe other climate control zones.X To deactivate: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout.Dual-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side.

3-zone automatic climate control: thetemperature setting for the driver's side isadopted for the front-passenger side andthe rear compartment.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost thewindshield or to defrost the inside of thewindshield and the side windows.

i You should only select the defrostingfunction until the windshield is clear again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Press theà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn temperature control: orBclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 127), (Y page 129).

orX Press theK orI button.

Operating the climate control systems 133

Climatecontrol

Z

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode onX To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To activate: press theÙ button again.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿ cooling with airdehumidification function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe defrosting function (Y page 133).

i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Press the_ button repeatedly until theO orP symbol appears in thedisplay.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGClear all windows of ice or snowbefore settingoff. Otherwise, impaired visibility couldendanger you and others.

The rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches offautomatically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

Problems with the rear windowdefrosterThe rear window defroster has deactivatedprematurely or cannot be activated.X Switch off any consumers that are notrequired, e.g. reading lamps or interiorlighting.When the battery is sufficiently charged,the rear window defroster is activatedagain automatically.

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation modeYou can deactivate the flow of fresh air ifunpleasant odors are entering the vehiclefrom outside. The air already inside thevehicle will then be recirculated.The operation of air-recirculation mode is thesame for all control panels.

G WARNINGAt low outside temperatures, only switch overto air-recirculation mode for brief periods.

134 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Otherwise, the windows could fog up, thusimpairing visibility and endangering yourselfand others. This may prevent you fromobserving the traffic conditions and therebycause an accident.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X To activate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button lightsup.

i In the event of high pollution levels8 or athigh outside temperatures, air-recirculation mode is automaticallyactivated. When air-recirculation mode isactivated automatically, the indicator lampin theg button is not lit.Outside air is added after about30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivatesautomatically:Rafter approximately five minutes atoutside temperatures belowapproximately 41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes ifcooling with air dehumidification isdeactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes atoutside temperatures aboveapproximately 41 ‡ (5 †) with the"cooling with air dehumidification"function switched on.

Activating/deactivating the residualheat functionThe residual heat function is only available invehicles for Canada with automatic climatecontrol.

It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating thestationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes afterthe engine has been switched off. The heatingtime depends on the temperature that hasbeen set.

i The blower will run at a low speedregardless of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock or remove it.

X To activate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press theÌ button.The indicator lamp in theÌ button goesout.

i Residual heat is deactivatedautomatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage dropsRwhen the auxiliary heating is activated

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could cause burns or frostbite tobare skin in the immediate vicinity of thevents. Keep bare skin away from these airvents. If necessary, direct the airflow away toa different area of the vehicle interior.

8 3-zone automatic climate control only.

Setting the air vents 135

Climatecontrol

Z

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet between the windshieldand the hood free of blockages, such as ice,snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the air vents to the centerposition.

Setting the center air vents

: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheels=and? up or down.

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air vent= Control for side air ventX Toopen/close: turn thumbwheel= to theleft or right.

Setting the glove box air ventWhen automatic climate control is activated,the glove box can be ventilated, for instanceto cool its contents. The level of airflowdepends on the airflow and air distributionsettings.

! Close the air vent when heating thevehicle.At high outside temperatures, open the airvent and activate the "cooling with airdehumidification" function. Otherwise,temperature-sensitive items stored in theglove box could be damaged.

: Air vent thumbwheel; Air vent

136 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel:clockwise or counter-clockwise.

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

: Rear-compartment air vent thumbwheel; Rear-compartment air vent, right= Rear control unit, only with 3-zone

automatic climate control9? Rear-compartment air vent, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheel: up ordown.

9 Only for Canada.

Setting the air vents 137

Climatecontrol

Z

138

Useful information ............................ 140Breaking-in notes .............................. 140Driving ............................................... 140Automatic transmission ................... 148Refueling ............................................ 156Parking ............................................... 158Driving tips ........................................ 160Driving systems ................................ 165

139

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Breaking-in notes

Important safety notesNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal.

The first 1,000 miles (1,500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varyingvehicle and engine speeds for the first1,000 miles (1,500 km).RIdeally, for the first 1,000 miles (1,500 km)drive in program E (drive program C onAMG vehicles).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at fullthrottle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before thetachometer needle isÔ of the way to thered area of the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.

RIf possible, do not depress the acceleratorpedal past the point of resistance(kickdown).ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 whendriving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually andaccelerate the vehicle to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.

i You should also observe these notes onrunning in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speedlimits.

AMG vehicles with rear axle lockingdifferentialYour vehicle is equipped with a self-lockingdifferential on the rear axle. To improve theprotection of the differential on the rear axle,change the oil after a break-in distance of2000 miles (3000 km). This oil changeextends the service life of the differential.Have the oil change carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

140 DrivingDrivingandparking

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), themaximum engine speed is restricted inorder to protect the engine. To protect theengine and maintain smooth engineoperation, avoid driving at full throttle whenthe engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKeyVehicles with automatic transmission:shift the transmission to position P

1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

The steering is locked when you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

i The SmartKey can be turned in theignition lock even if it is not the correctSmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

Driving 141

Drivingandparking

Z

KEYLESS-GO

General notesRDo not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:

- with electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKey

- with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoil

- inside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can impair the functionality of theKEYLESS-GO key.

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped witha SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a detachable Start/Stopbutton.The Start/Stop button must be inserted intothe ignition lock and the SmartKey must be inthe vehicle.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the differentSmartKey positions in the ignition lock. Thisis only the case if you are not depressing thebrake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine startsimmediately.The Start/Stop button can be removed fromthe ignition lock. Then, you can insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle. You should, however,always take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle. The vehicle can bestarted with the Start/Stop button if theSmartKey is in the vehicle.

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockX Insert Start/Stop button: into ignitionlock;.

i When you insert Start/Stop button:into ignition lock;, the system needsapproximately 2 seconds recognition time.You can then use Start/Stop button:.

Start/Stop button= USA only? Canada onlyX Position 0: if Start/Stop button: has notyet been pressed, this corresponds to theSmartKey being removed from the ignition.

X Position 1: press Start/Stop button:.You can now activate the windshieldwipers, for example.

i If you then open the driver's door when inthis position, the power supply isdeactivated.

X Position 2 (ignition): press Start/Stopbutton: twice.

142 DrivingDrivingandparking

i The power supply is switched off again if:Rthe driver's door is opened andRyou press Start/Stop button: oncewhen in this position.

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 247).

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

General notesi The catalytic converter is preheated forup to 30 seconds after a cold start. Thesound of the enginemay change during thistime.

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.The transmission position display in themultifunction display shows P.

i You can also start the engine when thetransmission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyi To start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 3 (Y page 141) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the engine

G WARNINGAs long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, thevehicle can be started. Therefore, never leavechildren unattended in the vehicle, as theycould otherwise accidentally start the engine.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Donot leave children unattended in the vehicle,or with access to an unlocked vehicle. Achild's unsupervised access to a vehicle couldresult in an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

i The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle without inserting theSmartKey into the ignition lock. The Start/Stop button must be inserted into theignition lock and the SmartKey must be inthe vehicle.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 142)once.The engine starts.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position if

Driving 143

Drivingandparking

Z

you depress the brake pedal. Only then isthe selector lever lock released.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the parking brake (Y page 159).X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

! If a warning tone sounds and theRelease Park. BrakeRelease Park. Brake message appearsin the multifunction display, the parkingbrake is still applied. Release the parkingbrake.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automatic doorlock (Y page 213).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.It holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will nolonger brake your vehicle and it could rollaway. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Take your foot off the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist will not function if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or ona downhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notesThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.The system is operational when the¤symbol is shown in green in the multifunctiondisplay.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 145) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display.If the ECO start/stop function has beenmanually deactivated (Y page 145) or a

144 DrivingDrivingandparking

malfunction has caused the system to bedeactivated, the¤ symbol is notdisplayed.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO button

DeactivatingX Press button:.Indicator lamp; on button: and the¤ symbol in themultifunction display goout.

ActivatingX Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If all conditionsfor automatic engine switch-off(Y page 145) are fulfilled, the¤ symbolis shown in green in the multifunctiondisplay.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 145) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display. If this is the case, theECO start/stop function is not available.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivatedmanually or as the result of a malfunction.The engine will then not be switched offautomatically when the vehicle stops.

i The ECO start/stop function is activatedeach time the engine is switched on.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D orN, the ECO start/stop function switches offthe engine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationaland the¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreenRthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe outside temperature is within thecomfort rangeRthe engine is at normal operatingtemperature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 145) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

i The engine can be switched offautomatically a maximum of four times(first stop and three subsequent stops) insuccession. The¤ symbol is shown inyellow in the multifunction display after theengine has been started automatically forthe fourth time. When the¤ symbol isshown in green in themultifunction display,automatic engine switch-off is againpossible.

i You can still activate the HOLD functionwhen the vehicle is stationary, even if the

Driving 145

Drivingandparking

Z

engine has been switched offautomatically. It is then not necessary tocontinue applying the brakes during theautomatic stop phase. When you depressthe accelerator pedal, the engine startsautomatically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated. Depress theaccelerator pedal carefully, as the enginemust be started first.

i During automatic engine switch-off, theclimate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require full climatecontrol capacity, the ECO start/stopfunction can be deactivated by pressing theECO button (Y page 145).

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button.Ryou release the brakes when intransmission position D or N and when theHOLD function is not active.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou move the transmission out of positionP.Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's door.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interiordeviates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on thewindshield when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe charge level of the battery is too low.

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

146 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock beforeattempting to start the engine again.

orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lampsin the instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 143). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine as thesewill drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 310).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving 147

Drivingandparking

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The engine is notrunning smoothly andis misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalyticconverter and damage it.

The coolanttemperature gaugeshows a value above248 ‡ (120 †).

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolantto cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 290). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

Selector lever

Overview of transmission positions

Example: selector leverj Park position with selector lever lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

148 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Transmission position and driveprogram display

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

The current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicatorsgo out when the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock.

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P(Y page 158) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theparking brake in addition to theparking lock in order to secure thevehicle.The SmartKey can only be removedif the transmission is in position P.If the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock, the selector leveris locked.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunctioning, the selector levermay be locked in position P. Torelease a locked selector lever, see"Manual override of parking lock"(Y page 155).

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

Automatic transmission 149

Drivingandparking

Z

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. The transmissioncould otherwise be damaged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission topositionN if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to theindividual gears automatically when it is intransmission position D. This automaticgearshifting behavior is determined by:Ra shift range restriction, if selectedRthe selected drive program (Y page 150)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Driving tips

AMG vehiclesWhen shifting down, the double-clutchfunction is active regardless of the currentlyselected drive program. The double-clutchfunction reduces load change reactions andis conducive to a sporty driving style. Thesound generated by the double-clutchfunction depends on the drive programselected.

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Program selector button

General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between different drivingcharacteristics.

Example: program selector button

E Economy Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 151).

Only change from automatic drive programE or S to manual drive program M when thevehicle is stationary.X Press program selector button:repeatedly until the letter for the desiredgearshift program appears in themultifunction display.

150 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

i When the engine is started, the automatictransmission always switches to automaticdrive program E (drive program C in AMGvehicles).

AMG vehicles

Drive program selector with manual drive program

C ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

S+ SportPlus Extremely sporty drivingstyle

M Manual Manual gear shifting

RS RACESTART

Optimal vehicleacceleration from astandstill

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 151).

Only change from automatic drive programC,S or S+ to manual drive programM when thevehicle is stationary.X Turn drive program selector: until thedesired drive program appears in themultifunction display in the speedometer.The drive program indicator on driveprogram selector: lights up in red.

i The automatic transmission shifts toautomatic drive program C each time theengine is started.

i RS cannot be selected during normaldriving. For further information on RACESTART, see (Y page 179).

Steering wheel paddle shifters

: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter

In the automatic drive program, you canrestrict or derestrict the shift range by usingthe steering wheel paddle shifters(Y page 152).In the manual drive program, you can changegear using the steering wheel paddle shiftersor the selector lever (Y page 153).

i You can only change gear with thesteering wheel paddle shifters when thetransmission is in position D.

Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on AMGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and automatictransmission settingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsoonerRthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully

Automatic transmission 151

Drivingandparking

Z

Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S (drive programs S and S+ onAMG vehicles) is characterized by thefollowing:Rsporty engine and automatic transmissionsettingsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatictransmission shift points

Shift ranges

IntroductionWhen the automatic transmission is inposition D, it is possible to restrict orderestrict the shift range (Y page 152).The shift range selected is shown in themultifunction display. The automatictransmission shifts only as far as the selectedgear.

Shift range

= You can use the engine's brakingeffect.

5 To use the braking effect of theengine on downhill gradients andfor driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 To use the braking effect of theengine on extremely steep downhillgradients and on long downhillstretches

Restricting the shift rangeX Press the selector lever to the left towardsD–.

orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The automatic transmission shifts downone gear and restricts the shift range to therelevant gear.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, theautomatic transmission protects againstengine damage by not shifting down.

i If the maximum engine speed for the shiftrange is reached and you continue toaccelerate, the automatic transmissionshifts up in order to prevent the enginefrom overrevving, even if the shift range isrestricted.

Derestricting the shift rangeX Briefly press the selector lever to the righttowards D+.

orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter.The shift range is derestricted.

Clearing the shift range restrictionX Press and hold the selector lever towardsD+ until D is shown once more in themultifunction display.

orX Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheelpaddle shifter until D is shown again in themultifunction display.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

152 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Selecting the ideal shift rangeX Press the selector lever to the left towardsD– and hold it in position.

orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter and hold it in position.The automatic transmission shifts to thegear which allows optimum accelerationand deceleration. To do this, the automatictransmission shifts down one or moregears.

Manual drive program

Switching on the manual drive programThemanual drive program is only available forvehicles with the dynamic handling packageand for AMG vehicles.Manual drive program M differs from driveprogram S (or, in the case of AMG vehicles,drive programs S and S+) with regard to:RspontaneityRresponsivenessRsmoothness of the gear changesX Press the program selector button(Y page 150) repeatedly untilM appears inthe multifunction display.

X AMG vehicles: turn the drive programselector (Y page 151) untilM appears in themultifunction display.The indicator M on the drive programselector lights up in red.

Upshiftingi Vehicles with the dynamic handlingpackage: if the maximum engine speed forthe shift range is reached and you continueto accelerate, the automatic transmissionshifts up. If manual drive program M isselected, the automatic transmission doesnot shift up.

X Briefly press the selector lever to the righttowards D+.

orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 151).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

AMG vehicles! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift upautomatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear isreached. When the engine limiting speed isreached, the fuel supply is cut to preventthe engine from overrevving. Always makesure that the engine speed does not reachthe red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator appears in themultifunction display.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicator

DownshiftingX Briefly press the selector lever to the lefttowards D–.

orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 151).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you brake the vehicle or stop withoutshifting down, the automatic transmissionwill shift down to a gear that will allow thevehicle to accelerate or pull away again.

Automatic transmission 153

Drivingandparking

Z

i Vehicles with the dynamic handlingpackage: to avoid overrevving the enginewhen downshifting, the automatictransmission does not shift to a lower gearif this would result in the maximum enginespeed being exceeded.

i For maximum acceleration, push theselector lever to the left or pull and hold theleft-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter untilthe transmission shifts to the optimal gearfor the current speed.

Kickdowni AMG vehicles: it is not possible to usekickdown in manual drive program M.

You can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

i During kickdown, you cannot change gearusing the steering wheel paddle shifters orthe selector lever.

Switching off themanual drive programX Vehicles with the dynamic handlingpackage: press the program selectorbutton (Y page 150).M is no longer shownin the multifunction display.

X AMG vehicles: turn the drive programselector (Y page 151) until C, S or S+appears in the multifunction display.

154 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Releasing the parking lock manuallyIn the event of an electrical malfunction, it ispossible to release the selector lever lockmanually to move it out of position P. This isthe case, for example, if you wish to tow thevehicle away.

! Do not use any sharp-edged objects toremove the selector lever gaiter from thecenter console. This could damage theselector lever gaiter.

X Apply the parking brake.X Pry off selector lever gaiter: with a flat,blunt object (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in

cloth) from the right-hand edge. Pullselector lever gaiter: up and out.

X Press release button; down andsimultaneously move the selector lever outof position P.The selector lever can now bemoved freelyuntil it is returned to position P.

Transfer caseThis section is only valid for vehicles with 4-wheel drive (4MATIC). Power is alwaystransmitted to both axles.

! Performance tests may only be carriedout on a 2-axle dynamometer. The brakesystem or transfer case could otherwise bedamaged. Contact a qualified specialistworkshop for a performance test.

! If the parking brake is being tested on abrake dynamometer, the ignition must beswitched off (SmartKey or Start/Stopbutton in position 0 or 1), as ESP® will

Automatic transmission 155

Drivingandparking

Z

otherwise automatically intervene. Thebrake systemcould otherwise be damaged.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGGasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.It burns violently and can cause seriouspersonal injury.Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline.Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline, avoidinhaling fumes and any skin or clothingcontact.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to yourhealth.

G WARNINGOverfilling of the fuel tank may createpressure in the system which could cause agas discharge. This could cause the gasolineto spray back out when removing the fuelpump nozzle, which could cause personalinjury.

G WARNINGE85 fuel (ethanol) and its vapours arepoisonous, highly flammable and highlycombustible. E85 fuel can cause seriousinjury if ignited, if you come into contact withit you or if you inhale fuel vapors. Avoidinhaling E85 fuel vapors and avoid skincontact with E85 fuel. Extinguish any nakedflames before refueling. Keep sparks awayfrom E85 fuel, and do not smoke.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Even small amounts of the

wrong fuel result in damage to the fuelsystem and engine.

! Do not switch on the ignition if youaccidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines.Notify a qualified specialist workshop andhave the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Further information on fuel and on fuel gradescan be found in the "Fuel" section(Y page 352).

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

: To open the fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type to be used

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or lockedautomatically when you open or close thevehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.

156 RefuelingDrivingandparking

The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

OpeningX Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.This corresponds to key position 0:"SmartKey removed".The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow:.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap fully.X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

ClosingX Replace the cap on the filler neck and turnclockwise until it engages audibly.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle. Otherwise, the locking pin of thecentral locking prevents the fuel filler flapfrom closing.

i If you drive with the fuel filler cap open,the8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes.A message appears in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 232).In addition, the;Check Enginewarninglamp may light up (Y page 253).

Fuel filler flap emergency releaseX Open the trunk lid.

X Open the right-hand side trim panel(Y page 315).

X Pull emergency release: in the directionof the arrow.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

X Open the fuel filler flap.

Refueling 157

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGThere is danger of fire or explosions.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and removeit immediately (Y page 141).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flapcannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 76).X Open the trunk lid.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release(Y page 157).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf flammable materials such as leaves, grassor twigs are exposed to prolonged contact toparts of the exhaust system that heat up, theycould ignite. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammablematerials come into contact with parts of thevehicle which are hot. Take particular care notto park on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brake

boosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out ofthe parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

158 ParkingDrivingandparking

! A moving vehicle can lead to damage tothe vehicle or damage to the drive train.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe parking brake must be applied.Rthe transmission must be in position P andthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Ron uphill or downhill gradients, the frontwheels must be turned towards the curb.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the parking brake firmly.X Shift the transmission to position P.Using the SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

i The SmartKey can only be removed if thetransmission is in position P.

Using KEYLESS-GOX Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 142).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.i When the driver's door is closed, thiscorresponds to SmartKey position 1. Whenthe driver's door is open, it corresponds to

SmartKey position 0 or "SmartKeyremoved".

If you try to switch off the engine when thetransmission is not in position P, a messageappears in the multifunction display. A signalsounds.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake thevehicle when the service brake is faulty. Donot apply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out ofthe parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Parking 159

Drivingandparking

Z

X To apply: depress parking brake; firmly.When the engine is running, the$ (USAonly) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamplights up in the instrument cluster.

X To release: depress the brake pedal andkeep it depressed.

X Pull release handle:.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the$ (USA only) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamp goes outin the instrument cluster.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.X Connecting a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialistworkshop.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage asa result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAlways remember that you must concentrateprimarily on driving the vehicle. The driver'sconcentration must always be directedprimarily at road traffic. For your own safetyand that of others, we recommend that youstop the vehicle at a safe place and inaccordance with the traffic conditions beforemaking or accepting a phone call.Comply with all legal requirements if you usethe telephone while driving. Use the hands-free system and only use the telephone when

road, weather and traffic conditions permit. Insome jurisdictions, it is forbidden for driversto use mobile phones while driving.Only operate the audio system or COMAND(Cockpit Management and Data System) incompliance with all legal requirements andwhen the road, weather and traffic conditionspermit. You may otherwise not be able toobserve the traffic conditions, endangeringyourself and others.Remember that your vehicle covers a distanceof 44 ft (approximately 14 m) a second whenit is traveling at only 30 mph (approximately50 km/h).

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.

X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof racks when they are notneeded.

X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work carried out asindicated by the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval display.

Fuel consumption also increases whendriving in cold weather, in stop-and-go trafficand in mountainous terrain.

160 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident are greatly increasedwhen you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Exhaust check

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the enginemust be carriedout by qualified and authorized Mercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO displayThe ECO display provides feedback on howeconomical your driving characteristics are.The ECO display assists you in achieving themost economical driving style for the

selected settings and existing conditions.Consumption can be significantly influencedby your driving style.

Example: ECO display

The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationRConstantRCoastingThe percentage count is themean value of thethree bar values. The three bars and themeanvalue begin at the value of 50%. A higherpercentage count indicates a moreeconomical driving style.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption. A fixed percentage countin the ECO display does not indicate a fixedconsumption figure in mpg (l/100 km).In addition to driving style, the consumptionis affected by many other factors, such as:RLoadRTire pressureRCold startRChoice of routeRThe use of electrical consumersThese factors are not included in the ECOdisplay.The evaluation of your driving style takes thefollowing three categories into consideration:Acceleration (evaluation of allacceleration processes)

The bar fills up: The bar empties:

Moderateacceleration,especially at higherspeeds

Sporty acceleration

Driving tips 161

Drivingandparking

Z

Constant (assessment of drivingbehavior at all times)

The bar fills up: The bar empties:

Constant speed andavoidance ofunnecessaryacceleration anddeceleration

Fluctuations inspeed

Coasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses)

The bar fills up: The bar empties:

Anticipatory driving,keeping yourdistance and earlyrelease of theaccelerator: thevehicle can coastwithout use of thebrakes

Frequent braking

i An economical driving style involvesdriving with a moderate engine speed.To achieve a higher value in the categories"acceleration" and "smooth driving":Robserve the gearshift recommendation.Rdrive the vehicle in drive program E(vehicles with automatic transmission).

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the freeway, only the bar for "smoothdriving" will change.

i The ECO display summarizes the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. Therefore, there aredynamic changes in the bars at the start ofa journey. During a prolonged driving time,these changes are smaller. For dynamicchanges, perform a manual reset.

For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 204).

Braking:

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery roadsurface. This could cause damage to thedrive train. This type of damage is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately.Drive on for a short while. This allows theairflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

162 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayedreaction from the brakeswhen braking for thefirst time. This may also occur after thevehicle has been washed.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having thevehicle washed, brake firmly while payingattention to the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the brake discs, thereby drying themmore quickly and protecting them againstcorrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

Servicing the brakes! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarning tone while the engine is running,the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checkedimmediately. This work should be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop. Consult aqualified specialist workshop to arrange this.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: function orperformance tests may only be carried outon a 2-axle dynamometer. If you areplanning to have the vehicle tested on sucha dynamometer, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to obtain furtherinformation first. Otherwise, you coulddamage the drive train or the brake system.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®system operates automatically, the engineand the ignition must be switched off(SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignitionlock or Start/Stop button in position 0 or1) while the parking brake is being testedon a brake dynamometer.Brakingmaneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

! Vehicles with 4MATIC: as the ESP®system operates automatically, the engineand the ignition system must be switchedoff (SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in theignition lock or Start/Stop button inposition 0 or 1) when:Rtesting the parking brake on a brakedynamometer.Ryou intend to have the vehicle towedwiththe front axle raised.

Brakingmaneuvers triggered automaticallyby ESP® may seriously damage the brakesystem.

If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test thefunctionality of your brakes at regularintervals. To do so, press firmly on the brakepedal when driving at a high speed. Thisimproves the grip of the brake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 63) or of BAS PLUS on(Y page 63).

Driving tips 163

Drivingandparking

Z

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect yourvehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

High-performance brake system forAMG vehiclesThe high-performance brake system isinstalled only on the C 63 AMG.

G WARNINGNew vehicle brake pads and discs, andreplacement brake pads and discs may takeseveral hundred miles of driving until theyprovide optimumbraking efficiency. Until thattime, you may need to use increased brakepedal pressurewhile braking. Please be awareof this and adjust your driving and brakingaccordingly during this break-in period.Excessive high-demand braking will causecorrespondingly high brake wear. Please beattentive to the brake warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and brake conditionmessages in the multifunction display.Especially for high performance driving, it isimportant to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

The high-performance brake system isdesigned for heavy loads. This may lead tonoise when braking. This will depend on:RspeedRbraking forceRenvironmental conditions, such astemperature and humidity

The wear and tear on individual brake systemcomponents, e.g. brake pads/linings ordiscs, depends on:Rthe individual driving styleRthe operating conditionsFor this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under allcircumstances. An aggressive driving stylewill lead to high wear. You can obtain furtherinformation about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain orin conditions in which hydroplaning mayoccur, you must drive in the followingmanner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electroniccomponents in the engine or the automatic

164 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

transmission. Water can also be drawn inby the engine's air suction nozzles and thiscan cause engine damage.

Winter driving:

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 320).

Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 320).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.

There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

G WARNINGThe outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand brakingmaneuvers. Do not use the cruisecontrol or DISTRONIC PLUS.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.

i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 321).

Driving systems

Cruise control

Important safety notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select shift range1, 2 or 3 in good time. By doing so, you willmake use of the braking effect of the engine,which relieves the load on the brake systemand prevents the brakes from overheatingand wearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Driving systems 165

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGThe cruise control is a convenience systemdesigned to assist the driver during vehicleoperation. The driver is and must alwaysremain responsible for the vehicle's speedand for safe brake operation.Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,and weather conditions make it advisable totravel at a constant speed.RThe use of the cruise control can bedangerous on winding roads or in heavytraffic because conditions do not allow safedriving at a constant speed.RThe use of the cruise control can bedangerous on slippery roads. Rapidchanges in tire traction can result in wheelspin and loss of control.RDeactivate the cruise control when drivingin fog.

The "Resume" function should only beoperated if the driver is fully aware of thepreviously set speed and wishes to resumethis particular preset speed.

G WARNINGThe cruise control brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To activate or reduce speed= To deactivate cruise control? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed

When you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds. In the multifunction display,the segments between the stored speed andthe maximum speed light up.

Storing and maintaining the currentspeedYou can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down;.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

Storing the current speed or calling upthe last stored speed

G WARNINGThe set speed stored in memory should onlybe set again if prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Possibleacceleration or deceleration differencesarising from returning to the preset speedcould cause an accident and/or serious injuryto you and others.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

166 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Setting a speed

G WARNINGKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has made the necessaryadjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed toa value that the prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Otherwise, suddenand unexpected acceleration or decelerationof the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):press the cruise control lever up: ordown; to beyond the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. Forexample, if you accelerate briefly toovertake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise controlThere are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards=.

orX Brake.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou depress the parking brake.Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h).RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.Ryou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving.

If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the CruiseCruiseControl OffControl Off message in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

Important safety notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain thedistance to the vehicle detected in front.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.On long and steep downhill gradients,especially if the vehicle is laden, you mustselect shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine, which relieves the loadon the brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-movingvehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in orderto maintain the preset distance to the vehiclein front.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS requires familiarity withits operational characteristics. We stronglyrecommend that you review the followinginformation carefully before operating thesystem.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS is a conveniencesystem. Its speed adjustment reduction

Driving systems 167

Drivingandparking

Z

capability is intended to make cruise controlmore effective and usable when traffic speedsvary. It is not however, intended to, nor doesit, replace the need for extreme care.The responsibility for the vehicle's speed,distance to the preceding vehicle and, mostimportantly, brake operation to ensure a safestopping distance, always remains with thedriver.The DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take street andtraffic conditions into account.Complex driving situations are not alwaysfully recognized by the DISTRONIC PLUS. Thiscould result in wrong or missing distancewarnings.

If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you,the radar sensor system must be activated(Y page 213) and operational.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol in the speed range between 20 mph(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front ofyou, it operates in the speed range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,it can resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usethe device in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS distance is not a substitutefor the active intervention of the driver. It doesnot detect pedestrians or stationary objects,nor can it detect, recognize or predict theroad's course or the movements of vehiclesin front. DISTRONIC PLUS can only brake thevehicle using 40% of the vehicle's maximumavailable brake force.DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving in the lane beyond the lanenext to your vehicle, especially if the vehiclesare not driving on the middle of their lane.The driver must always pay careful attentionto the road, weather and traffic conditions.The driver must drive, steer and brake in amanner which will allow him to always havecontrol of the vehicle.Sources of high-frequency radio waves, suchas toll stations, speed-measuring radar, etc.,can cause DISTRONIC PLUS to failtemporarily.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take road andtraffic conditions into account. Only use theDISTRONIC PLUS if the road, weather andtraffic conditions make it advisable to travelat a constant speed.

168 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

G WARNINGUse of the DISTRONIC PLUS can bedangerous on slippery roads. Rapid changesin tire traction can result in wheel spin andloss of control.The DISTRONIC PLUS does not function inadverse sight and distance conditions. Do notuse the DISTRONIC PLUS during conditions offog, heavy rain, snow or sleet.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take weatherconditions into account. Switch off theDISTRONIC PLUS or do not switch it on if:Rroads are slippery or covered with snow orice. The wheels could lose traction whilebraking or accelerating, and the vehiclecould skid.RtheDISTRONIC PLUS system sensor coversare dirty or visibility is diminished due tosnow, rain or fog, for example. The distancecontrol system functionality could beimpaired.

Always pay attention to surrounding trafficconditions even while the DISTRONIC PLUS isswitched on. Otherwise, you may not be ableto recognize dangerous situations until it istoo late. This could cause an accident inwhichyou and/or others could be injured.

G WARNINGThe "Resume" function should only beoperated if the driver is fully aware of thepreviously set speed and wishes to resumethis particular preset speed.

G WARNINGYour undivided attention to street and trafficconditions is necessary at all times whetherDISTRONIC PLUS is active or not.The use of DISTRONIC PLUS can bedangerous onwinding roads or in heavy trafficbecause conditions do not allow safe drivingat a constant speed.

DISTRONIC PLUS does not react to stationaryobjects on the road (for example, a vehiclestopped in traffic or an abandoned vehicle).DISTRONIC PLUS likewise does not react tooncoming vehicles.Deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS:Rwhen changing to the right lane, if thevehicles in the left lane are driving slowerRwhen driving into a filter lane or anexpressway exitRin complex driving situations, for examplein construction sites on an expressway

In these situations DISTRONIC PLUS willmaintain the set speed if it is not deactivated.DISTRONIC PLUS is intended only formaintaining a set speed and a set distancefrom the objects moving in front of thevehicle.

G WARNINGAn intermittent warning sounds and thedistancewarning lamp· in the instrumentcluster is illuminated if the DISTRONIC PLUSsystem calculates that the distance to thevehicle ahead and your vehicle's currentspeed indicate that the DISTRONIC PLUS willnot be capable of slowing the vehiclesufficiently to maintain the preset followingdistance, which creates a danger of acollision.Immediately brake the vehicle to increaseyour distance to the preceding vehicle. Thewarning sound is intended as a final cautionin which you should intercede with your ownbraking inputs to avoid a potentiallydangerous situation. Do not wait for theoperation of the warning signal to intercedewith your own braking. This will result inpotentially dangerous emergency brakingwhich will not always result in an impact beingavoided.Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with amaximum deceleration of 13 ft/s2 (4 m/s2).This corresponds to approximately 40% ofyour vehicle's maximum braking force.To avoid a collision, youmust apply the brakesyourself. DISTRONIC PLUS brakes the vehiclejust enough to restore the preset speed or thepreset distance to the vehicle in front.

G WARNINGIf you do not receive visual or acousticwarning signals during a critical trafficsituation, DISTRONIC PLUS has either notrecognized the collision risk, has beendeactivated or is malfunctioning.Remember, whether or not DISTRONIC PLUSis operating, it is ultimately always the driversresponsibility to apply the brakes in order tocontrol the vehicle and avoid a collision.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

= To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS? To store the current speed or calling up

the last stored speedA To set the specified minimum distance

Switching on DISTRONIC PLUS, storingand maintaining the current speed

Important safety notesG WARNINGThe vehicle can be braked when DISTRONICPLUS is activated. For this reason, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS if the vehicle is to be set inmotion by other means (e.g. in a car wash orby towing).

In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, thefollowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must be released.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe hood must be closed.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doorsmust be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

Activating while drivingYou can also activate DISTRONIC PLUS whendriving at speeds below 20 mph (30 km/h),only if the vehicle in front has been detectedand is shown in the multifunction display. Ifthe vehicle in front is no longer detected anddisplayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off anda tone sounds.

170 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, or press it up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down; until the desired speedis set.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS OverrideDISTRONIC PLUS Overridemessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. You will be driving at the speedyou determine by the position of theaccelerator pedal.

Activating when driving towards astationary vehicleIf the vehicle in front of you is stationary, youcan only activate DISTRONIC PLUS once yourvehicle is stationary as well.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?, or press it up: or down;.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

i DISTRONIC PLUS can only be activated atunder 20mph(30 km/h) if a vehicle in fronthas been detected. Therefore, theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theinstrument cluster should be activated(Y page 209).

X Press the cruise control lever repeatedlyup: or down; until the desired speedis set.

i You can use the cruise control lever to setthe stored speed and the control on thecruise control lever to set the specifiedminimum distance (Y page 173).

Pulling awayX If the vehicle in front pulls away: removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.

DrivingIf there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front has slowed down, it brakes yourvehicle. In this way, the distance you haveselected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is driving faster, it accelerates yourvehicle, but only up to the speed you havestored.

G WARNINGIf you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.DISTRONIC PLUS then no longer brakes yourvehicle. In such cases, control the distancefrom vehicles travelling in front with the brakealone. You could otherwise cause an accidentand thereby injure yourself and others. Thedriver remains fully responsible for thevehicle's distance from other vehicles, thespeed being driven and for braking in goodtime.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than40 mph(60 km/h).RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining thedistance to a vehicle in front.Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal.RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision.

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicleis accelerated. Acceleration will beinterrupted if changing lanes takes too longor if the distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS and Active Blind Spot Assistare only aids designed to assist driving.They do not relieve you of the responsibilityof paying attention. The driver remains fullyresponsible for the vehicle's distance fromother vehicles, the vehicle's speed and forbraking in good time. Always pay attention totraffic conditions and your surroundings.Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangersin time, cause an accident and injure yourselfand others.

StoppingG WARNINGNever get out of the vehicle when DISTRONICPLUS is activated.DISTRONIC PLUS must also never beoperated, activated or deactivated by apassenger or from outside the vehicle.DISTRONIC PLUS does not replace theparking brake and must not be used forparking.The DISTRONIC PLUS braking effect iscanceled and the vehicle can start moving if:RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated using thecruise control lever.Ryou accelerate.Rthere is a malfunction in the system or aninterruption in the power supply, e.g.battery failure.Rthe electrical system in the enginecompartment, the battery or the fuses aretampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.

If you wish to leave the vehicle or park it,deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS and secure thevehicle against rolling away.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle untilit is stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimumdistance, your vehicle will come to astandstill at a sufficient distance behind thevehicle in front. The specified minimumdistance is set using the control on thecruise control lever.

You will see a warning message in themultifunction display if DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe hood is opened.Select Park (P)Select Park (P)X Shift the transmission to position P toprevent the vehicle from rolling away.DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Thewarning message in the multifunctiondisplay disappears.

The horn will also sound at regular intervals ifDISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver'sdoor and remove your seat beltRopen the hoodThe sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked whileDISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The soundbecomes louder if you attempt to lock thevehicle. The vehicle is not locked untilDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

i If the engine has been switched off, itcannot be started again until DISTRONICPLUS has been deactivated.

172 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated and amalfunction occurs in the system or if thereis a disruption in the power supply, theBrake ImmediatelyBrake Immediately message is shown inthe multifunction display. Immediatelydepress the brake firmly until the warningmessage in themultifunction display goes outor shift the transmission to position P.DISTRONIC PLUS is then deactivated.

Setting a speed

G WARNINGKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has made the necessaryadjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed toa value that the prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Otherwise, suddenand unexpected acceleration or decelerationof the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

X Press the cruise control lever up: for ahigher speed or down; for a lower speed.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: ordown; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):press the cruise control lever up: ordown; to beyond the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up: or down;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finishedovertaking.

Storing the current speed or calling upa stored speed

G WARNINGThe set speed stored in memory should onlybe set again if prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Possibleacceleration or deceleration differencesarising from returning to the preset speedcould cause an accident and/or serious injuryto you and others.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distancethat DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 174).

G WARNINGIt is up to the driver to exercise discretion toselect the appropriate setting given roadconditions, traffic, driver's preferred drivingstyle and applicable laws and drivingrecommendations for safe following distance.

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

X To increase: turn control; in direction=.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control; indirection:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

i Make sure that youmaintain a sufficientlysafe distance from the vehicle in front.Adjust the distance to the vehicle in front ifnecessary.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in thespeedometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments; in the set speed range lightup.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in themultifunction display

General notesIn the Assistance menu (Y page 209) of theon-board computer, you can select thedistance display.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivatedX Select the Distance DisplayDistance Display functionwith the on-board computer (Y page 209).

When DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, youwill see the following in the multifunctiondisplay:

: Symbol for activated PRE-SAFE® Brake; Vehicle in front, if detected= Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front? Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustableA Own vehicle

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isactivatedX Select the Distance DisplayDistance Display functionwith the on-board computer (Y page 209).

You will see the stored speed for about fivesecondswhen you activateDISTRONICPLUS.After this time, you will see the following in

174 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

the multifunction display while DISTRONICPLUS is activated:

: DISTRONIC PLUS activated; Own vehicle= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Vehicle in front, if detected

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and releasesthe brakes if the vehicle is slowed down to aspeed below20mph (30km/h) by the system,provided that DISTRONIC PLUS does notdetect a vehicle directly in front. At this point,the driver must apply the brakes in order toslow down further and bring the vehicle to astandstill.

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off messagein the multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou engage the parking brake.Ryou are driving slower than15 mph(25 km/h) and there is no vehiclein front, or if the vehicle in front is no longerdetected.RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.Rthe transmission is in theP,R orN position.Ryou switch off the radar sensor system(Y page 213).Ryou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopen.Rthe vehicle has skidded.If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in themultifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.If the vehicle has been stopped byDISTRONICPLUS and amalfunction occurs in the system,the BrakeBrake ImmediatelyImmediatelymessage appears inthe multifunction display. Depress the brakepedal immediately so that the vehicle doesnot roll away. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated, and the message disappears.

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Important safety notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS works to maintain thespeed selected by the driver unless a movingobstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in thesame travel direction is detected (e.g.following another vehicle ahead of you at yourset distance).This means that:RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle afteryou have changed lanes.RWhile in a sharp turn or if the precedingvehicle is in a sharp turn, the DISTRONICPLUS could lose sight of the precedingvehicle. Your vehicle could then accelerateto the previously selected speed.

The DISTRONIC PLUS regulates only thedistance between your vehicle and thosedirectly ahead of it. It may not registerstationary objects in the road, e.g.:Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jamRa disabled vehicleRan oncoming vehicleThe driver must always be alert, observe alltraffic and intercede as required by means ofsteering or braking the vehicle.

G WARNINGThe DISTRONIC PLUS should not be used insnowy or icy road conditions.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detectvehicles when cornering is limited. Yourvehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

176 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected thevehicle cutting in yet. The distance to thisvehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake forobstacles or stationary vehicles. If, forexample, the detected vehicle turns a cornerand reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane.Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lightswith crossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Dynamic handling package withsports mode

General notesThe most important part of the dynamichandling package with sports mode is theadjustable damping system. Thisautomatically controls and adapts thesuspension to the respective drivingsituation.The calibration of the suspension dependson:Ryour driving styleRthe road surface conditionsRyour individual selection; see the followingdescription

If your vehicle is equipped with automatictransmission, the dynamic handling packagewith sports mode also includes steeringwheel paddle shifters (Y page 151) with amanual drive program (Y page 153).

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

Example: position of dynamic handling packagewith sports mode buttonX Start the engine.

Sports tuningThe firmer setting of the suspension tuning insports mode ensures even better contactwith the road. Select this mode whenemploying a sporty driving style, e.g. onwinding country roads.Your selection remains stored until youswitch off the engine.X Press button;.Indicator lamp: lights up. Sportssuspension tuning is selected. Dependingon the engine output, the accelerator pedalis more responsive. On vehicles withautomatic transmission, drive program S isselected.

Comfort tuningIn Comfort mode, the driving characteristicsof your vehicle are more comfortable.Therefore, select this mode if you favor amore comfortable driving style. Selectcomfort mode also when driving fast onstraight roads, e.g. on straight stretches offreeway.X Press button;.Indicator lamp: goes out. Comfortablesuspension tuning is selected. On vehicleswith automatic transmission, driveprogram E is selected.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running.Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastened.Rthe parking brake is released.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Activating the HOLD functionX Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntilë appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

G WARNINGThe vehicle's brakes are applied when theHOLD function is activated. For this reason,deactivate the HOLD function if the vehicle is

178 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

to be set in motion by other means (e.g. in acar wash or by towing).

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivatedautomatically if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is inposition D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with acertain amount of pressure untilëdisappears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGNever get out of the vehicle when the HOLDfunction is activated.The HOLD function must never be operatedor deactivated by a passenger or from outsidethe vehicle.The HOLD function does not replace theparking brake and must not be used forparking.The braking effect of the HOLD function iscanceled and the vehicle could roll away if:Rthe HOLD function is deactivated bydepressing the accelerator pedal or thebrake pedal.Rthere is a malfunction in the system or aninterruption in the power supply, e.g.battery failure.Rthe electrical system in the enginecompartment, the battery or the fuses aretampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.If you leave the vehicle or park it, deactivatethe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

You will see a warning message in themultifunction display if the HOLD function isactivated and:

Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe hood is opened.Select Park (P)Select Park (P)X Shift the transmission to position P toprevent the vehicle from rolling away.The HOLD function is deactivated. Thewarning message in the multifunctiondisplay disappears.

A horn will also sound at regular intervals ifthe HOLD function is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver'sdoor and remove your seat beltRopen the hoodThe sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked while theHOLD function is still activated. If you attemptto lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.The vehicle is not locked until the HOLDfunction is deactivated.

i If the engine has been switched off, it cantbe started again until the HOLD functionhas been deactivated.

If there is a malfunction in the system orpower supply while the HOLD function isactivated, the BrakeBrake ImmediatelyImmediatelymessageis shown in the multifunction display.Immediately depress the brake firmly untilthe warning message in the multifunctiondisplay goes out.You can also shift the transmission to positionP. This deactivates the HOLD function.

RACE START

Important safety notesi RACE START is only available in AMGvehicles.

RACE START enables optimal accelerationfrom a standing start. The precondition forthis is a suitable high-grip road surface.

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

G WARNINGRACE START is only available when SPORThandling mode is activated. SPORT handlingmode only stabilizes the vehicle to a limitedextent in the event of swerving or wheelspin.RACE START should only be used on speciallydesignated roads. Always adapt your speedand driving style to the prevailing road andweather conditions.

Conditions for activationYou can activate RACE START if:Rthe doors are closed.Rthe engine is running and it has reached anoperating temperature of approximately176 ‡ (80 †). This is the case when theengine oil temperature in the multifunctiondisplay stops flashing.RSPORT handling mode is activated(Y page 66).Rthe steering wheel is in the straight-aheadposition.Rthe vehicle is stationary and the brakepedal is depressed (left foot).Rthe transmission is in position D.

Activating RACE STARTX Depress the brake pedal with your left footand keep it depressed.

X Turn the drive program selector clockwise(Y page 150) until the RS lamp lights up.The multifunction display shows the RACERACESTART Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel:START Confirm: Paddle UP Cancel:Paddle DOWNPaddle DOWN message.i If the activation conditions are no longerfulfilled, RACE START is canceled. Themultifunction display shows the RACERACESTART CanceledSTART Canceled message.

X To cancel: pull the left steering wheel shiftpaddle (Y page 151).

orX To confirm: pull the right steering wheelshift paddle (Y page 151).The RACE START Available DepressRACE START Available Depressgas pedalgas pedal message appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not depress the acceleratorpedal fully within two seconds, RACESTART is canceled. The multifunctiondisplay shows the RACE START NotRACE START NotPossible See Operator's ManualPossible See Operator's Manualmessage.

X Fully depress the accelerator pedal.The engine speed rises to approximately3,500 rpm.The RACE START Release brake toRACE START Release brake tostartstart message appears in themultifunction display.i If you do not release the brake pedalwithin five seconds, RACE START iscanceled. The multifunction display showsthe RACE START CanceledRACE START Canceled message.

X Take your foot off the brake, but keep theaccelerator pedal depressed.The vehicle pulls away at maximumacceleration.The RACERACE STARTSTART ActiveActivemessage appearsin the multifunction display.

RACE START is deactivated when the vehiclereaches a speed of approximately 30 mph(Canada: 50 km/h). Drive program S+ isactivated. SPORT handling mode remainsactivated.RACE START is deactivated immediately ifyou release the accelerator pedal duringRACE START or if any of the activationconditions are no longer fulfilled. Themultifunction display shows the RACERACE STARTSTARTNot Possible See Operator's ManualNot Possible See Operator's Manualmessage.

i If RACE START is used repeatedly withina short period of time, it is only available

180 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

again after the vehicle has been driven acertain distance.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)

G WARNINGIf a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficienttraction:RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle aspossible.RWhile driving, ease up on the acceleratorpedal.RAdapt your speed and driving style to theprevailing road conditions.

Failure to observe these guidelines couldcause the vehicle to skid.4MATIC cannot prevent accidents resultingfrom excessive speed.

! Never tow the vehicle with one axleraised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheels must remain either on the groundor be fully raised. Observe the instructionsfor towing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels arepermanently driven. Together with ESP®, itimproves the traction of your vehiclewhenever a drive wheel spins due toinsufficient grip.

i In wintry driving conditions, themaximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe PARKTRONIC is a supplemental system.It is not intended to, nor does it replace, the

need for extreme care. The responsibilityduring parking and other critical maneuversalways remains with the driver.

G WARNINGMake sure no persons or animals are in ornear the area in which you are parking/maneuvering. Otherwise, they could beinjured.

PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front and foursensors in the rear.

: Example: sensors in the front bumper,left-hand side

Range of the sensors

General notesThe sensors must be free of dirt, ice andslush. Otherwise, they may not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, taking

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

care not to scratch or damage them(Y page 295).

Side view

Top view

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40 in (approx.100 cm)

Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.60 cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48 in (approx.120 cm)

Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.80 cm)

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.

The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8 in (approx.20 cm)

Corners Approx. 6 in(approx.15 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and awarning tone sounds. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance may nolonger be shown.

Warning displaysThe warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area islocated on the headliner in the rearcompartment.

182 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning display for each side of thevehicle is divided into five yellow and two redsegments. PARKTRONIC is operational ifyellow segments showing operationalreadiness= light up.The selected transmission positiondetermines which warning display is activewhen the engine is running.

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rollingbackwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately twoseconds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp: lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated. Parking Guidance is alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock.

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately20 seconds, and theindicator lamp in thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately20 seconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 295).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Parking Guidance

Important safety notesi Parking Guidance is only available inCanada.

Parking Guidance is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. Ultrasound is used tomeasure the road on both sides of the vehicle.A suitable parking space is indicated by theparking symbol. You receive steeringinstructions when parking. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 181).

G WARNINGParking Guidance is merely an aid and maydisplay parking spaces that are not suitablefor parking, for example:Rno-parking areasRparking spaces with unsuitable surfaces(road surface)RdrivewaysRentrances and exitsParking Guidance detects and measurespotential parking spaces while driving past.Changes to the parking space after this pointare not taken into account, for example if thevehicle in front of or behind the parking spacechanges position or objects in the parkingspace are moved.Even when using Parking Guidance, you arestill responsible for driving carefully. If yourely on Parking Guidance alone, you could

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.Safety always remains your responsibility andyou must continue paying careful attention toyour immediate surroundings when parkingand maneuvering.

G WARNINGObjects located above the height range ofParking Guidance will not be detected whenthe parking space is measured. These objectsare not taken into account when the parkingprocedure is calculated, e.g. overhangingloads, tail sections or loading ramps of goodsvehicles. Under some circumstances, ParkingGuidance might therefore issue steeringinstructions too soon. This may lead to acollision. For this reason, you should avoidusing Parking Guidance in such situations.

G WARNINGMake sure that no persons or animals are inthe maneuvering range. Otherwise, theycould be injured.

! Pay particular attention to low objects orobjects with flat surfaces, such as trailerdrawbars, posts, cross beams and curbs.These types of objects cannot be detectedby Parking Guidance and may damage thevehicle.

When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, ParkingGuidance is also unavailable.Use Parking Guidance for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.not on the pavement, for example. ParkingGuidance may not detect flat curbs

Parking tips:Ron narrow roads, drive past the parkingspace as close as possible.Rparking spaces that are littered, overgrownor partially occupied by trailer drawbarsmight be identified incorrectly or not at all.

Rsnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.Rpay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 182) warning messages during theparking procedure.Rwhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, youmust not use ParkingGuidance.Rnever use Parking Guidance with snowchains or an emergency spare wheelmounted.Rmake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct effect onthe steering instructions.Rthe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include theposition and shape of the vehicles parkedin front and behind it and the conditions ofthe location. In some cases, ParkingGuidance may guide you too far or not farenough into a parking space. In somecases, it may also lead you across or ontothe curb. If necessary, cancel the parkingprocedure with Parking Guidance.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not ata sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

Detecting a parking space

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the right

Parking Guidance is automatically activatedwhen you drive forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, the

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

system independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol; asa status indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right= or the left: alsoappears. Parking Guidance only displaysparking spaces on the front-passenger sideas standard. Parking spaces on the driver'sside are displayed as soon as the turn signalon the driver's side is activated. To park onthe driver's side, you must leave the driver'sside turn signal switched on until you haveengaged reverse gear.Parking Guidance will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wideRthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer thanyour vehicle

A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you areapproximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

Parking

G WARNINGThe Parking Guidance is only an aid and maynot detect all obstacles. The ParkingGuidance does not relieve you of theresponsibility to pay attention. You are alwaysresponsible for safety and must continue topay attention to your immediate surroundingswhen parking and maneuvering. Otherwise,you could endanger yourself and others.

X Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Shift the transmission to position R.The multifunction display shows theCheck Vehicle Surroundings PressCheck Vehicle Surroundings Press'OK' to Confirm'OK' to Confirm message.

X Press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel to confirm.The multifunction display switches toParking Guidance.Depending on your distance from theparking space, the Please DrivePlease DriveBackwardBackward message will appear in themultifunction display.

X If necessary, reverse towards the parkingspace. This is indicated by an arrowpointing backwards.Continue backing up until you hear a tone.Stop – the parking position has beenreached. The arrow is white.The Please Steer Wheel to thePlease Steer Wheel to theRightRight or Please Steer Wheel to thePlease Steer Wheel to theLeftLeftmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X While the vehicle is stationary, turn thesteering wheel in the specified direction

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

until the arrow is white and a warning tonesounds.

X To reverse into the parking space:maintain the steering wheel angle andreverse carefully.

X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,The vehicle has reached the position inwhich you need to countersteer.The Please Steer Wheel to the LeftPlease Steer Wheel to the Leftor Please Steer Wheel to the RightPlease Steer Wheel to the Rightmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Countersteering: while the vehicle isstationary, turn the steering wheel in thespecified direction until the arrow is whiteand a warning tone sounds.

X To reverse into the parking space:maintain the steering wheel angle andreverse carefully.

X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone.The Parking Guidance FinishedParking Guidance Finishedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay and a tone sounds. You may beasked to steer in a different direction andthen change gear. In this case, furtherdisplays in the multifunction display willdirect you to the final position.

X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messagesdisplayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 182).

Canceling Parking GuidanceX Press the PARKTRONIC button on thecenter console (Y page 183).Parking Guidance is canceled immediatelyand PARKTRONIC is deactivated.

Parking Guidance is canceled automatically ifit is no longer possible to guide you into theparking space, or if a malfunction occurs.The parking space symbol goes out and awarning tone sounds. The ParkingParkingGuidanceGuidance CanceledCanceledmessage appears in themultifunction display.

Rear view camera

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is an optical parking aid.It shows the area behind your vehicle in theCOMAND display.

G WARNINGMake sure that no persons or animals are inthe maneuvering range. Otherwise, theycould be injured.

The rear view camera is located in the handlestrip of the trunk lid.

: Rear view camera

View through the cameraThe area behind the vehicle is displayed as amirror image, as in the rear view mirror.

G WARNINGThe rear view camera is only an aid and maydisplay obstaclesRfrom a distorted perspectiveRinaccuratelyRmay not display obstacles at allThe rear view camera does not relieve you ofthe responsibility to be cautious. Take careand pay careful attention. The rear viewcamera may not show objects which areRvery close to the rear bumperRunder the rear bumperRabove the trunk handle

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

You are responsible for safety at all times andmust continue to pay attention to theimmediate surroundings when parking andmaneuvering. This includes the area behind,in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwiseyou could endanger yourself and/or others.

G WARNINGThe rear view camera will not function or willnot fully function if:Rthe trunk lid is openRit is raining or snowing strongly or if it isfoggyRit is night or if you are parking/maneuvering your vehicle in a very darkareaRa very bright white light is affecting thecameraRthe immediate vicinity is illuminated withfluorescent light (the display of theCOMAND system can flicker)Rtemperature changes abruptly, for exampleif you drive out of the cold into a heatedgarage (condensation on the lens)Rthe camera lens is dirty or coveredRthe rear of your vehicle is damagedIn this case, have the position and thesetting of the camera checked at aspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you consult a Mercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.

Do not use the rear view camera in thesesituations. You could otherwise injureyourself and other people and/or causedamage - including damage to your vehicle -while parking/maneuvering.

Activating the rear view cameraX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the rear view camerafunction is selected in COMAND (see the

separate operating instructions forCOMAND).

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys such as on freewaysand interstate highways. It is active in therange between 50 mph (80 km/h) and112 mph (180 km/h).If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration on the part of the driver, itsuggests you take a break.

G WARNINGATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid and maydetect your tiredness or lapses inconcentration too late or not at all. It is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.Fatigue may cause you to recognizehazardous situations too late, misjudge asituation or react more slowly. For thisreason, make sure you feel rested before youbegin driving and during your journey. Makesure that you take regular breaks in time,particularly on long journeys. Otherwise, youmay fail to recognize dangers in time, causean accident and injure yourself and others.

ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steeringcharacteristicsRdriving conditions, e.g. time, driving time

188 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if thesurface is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side windRif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slowerthan 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than112 mph (180 km/h)Rif you are currently using COMAND ormaking a telephone call with itRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

Warning and display messages in themultifunction display

X Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 210).Symbol: appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will bewarned no sooner than 20 minutes after yourjourney has begun. You then hear anintermittent warning tone twice and theAttention Assist: DrowsinessAttention Assist: DrowsinessDetectedDetected message appears in themultifunction display.X If necessary, take a break.X Press thea button to confirm themessage.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break, you will be warned again

after 15 minutes at the earliest. Theprecondition for this is thatATTENTION ASSIST still detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration.ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when youcontinue your journey and starts assessingyour tiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

Lane Tracking package

General notesThe Lane Tracking package consists of BlindSpot Assist (Y page 189) and Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 191).

Blind Spot Assist

Important safety notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audiblecollision warning. Blind Spot Assist usessensors in the rear bumper for monitoringpurposes.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist is only an aid designed toassist driving. It may fail to detect somevehicles and is no substitute for attentivedriving.Blind Spot Assist cannot detect road andtraffic conditions. It may fail to detect narrowvehicles, such as motorcycles or bicycles, ormay only detect them too late.

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

Monitoring may be affected by dirty sensors,strong spray or poor visibility caused by snow,rain ormist, for example. In this case, vehiclesare detected late or not at all.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

For Blind Spot Assist to assist you whendriving, the radar sensor system must beactivated (Y page 213) and operational.

Monitoring range of the sensorsBlind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assistmonitors certain areas in theimmediate vicinity of your vehicle. Vehiclesthat approach and drive past at high speedsare not detected. There is no display and nowarning.If the lanes are very wide, it may not bepossible to monitor the complete width of theneighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles inthe next lane may not be detected, especiallyif they are driving in a staggered formation.This may be the case if vehicles are driving atthat edge of their lane which is furthest awayfrom your vehicle.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error whendriving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside long vehicles, for examplelorries, for a prolonged time.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rearbumper. Make sure that the bumper is freefrom dirt, ice or slush around the sensors. Thesensors must not be covered, for example bycycle racks or overhanging loads. Following asevere impact or in the event of damage tothe bumpers, have the function of the sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not workproperly.

190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h) theindicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assistis operational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp: on thecorresponding side lights up red. Thiswarningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist is not active at speeds belowapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Theindicator lamps in the exterior mirrors areyellow. Vehicles in the monitoring range arethen not indicated.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, detected vehiclesare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that the radar sensor system(Y page 213) and Blind Spot Assist(Y page 210) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist does not keep yourvehicle in its lane. It is only an aid and maydetect the lane markings on the roadincorrectly or not at all.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due toinsufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or spray.Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the camera.Rseveral or no lanemarkings for a single laneare present.Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetected.

Driving systems 191

Drivingandparking

Z

Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear,e.g. near roadworks.Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormerge.Rthe road is narrow and winding.Lane Keeping Assist cannot detect road andtraffic conditions. It is not a substitute forattentive driving. You are responsible for thevehicle's speed, braking in good time, andsteering correctly. Always adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing road and weatherconditions. Always pay attention to trafficconditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,you may fail to recognize dangers in time,cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle by means of camera:,at the top of the windshield. Lane KeepingAssist detects lane markings on the road andwarns you before you leave your laneunintentionally.

: Active Lane Keeping Assist camera

If you select kmkm on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function (Y page 211), Lane Keeping Assistis active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If themilesmiles display unit is selected, the assistancerange begins at 40 mph.A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn youby means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Switching on Lane Keeping Assist

X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive(Y page 210).Symbol: appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,symbol: is shown in green. Lane KeepingAssist is ready for use.

StandardIf StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

AdaptiveIf AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lane quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.

192 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. afreeway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Active Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Active Driving Assistance packageconsists of DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167),Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 189) andActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 196).

Active Blind Spot Assist

Important safety notesG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aid, andmay detect vehicles/obstacles incorrectly ornot at all.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due to snow,rain, fog or spray.Rthe rear and/or front sensors are dirty.Active Blind Spot Assist may not detectnarrow vehicles, such as motorcycles orbicycles, or may only detect them too late. Itcannot detect vehicles that are overtaken ata small distance and then enter the blind spotarea.Active Blind Spot Assist cannot detect roadand traffic conditions. It is not a substitute forattentive driving. You are responsible for thevehicle's speed, braking in good time, andsteering correctly. Always adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing road and weatherconditions. Always pay attention to traffic

conditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,you may fail to recognize dangers in time,cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Active Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem to monitor the side areas of yourvehicle which are in back of the driver. Awarning display in the exterior mirrors drawsyour attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audiblecollision warning. If a risk of lateral collisionis detected, corrective braking may help youavoid a collision. To support the course-correcting brake application, Active BlindSpot Assist also uses the forward-facing radarsensor system. Active Blind Spot Assistsupports you from a speed of approximately20 mph(30 km/h).For Active Blind Spot Assist to assist youwhen driving, the radar sensor system mustbe activated (Y page 213) and operational.

Monitoring range of the sensorsG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist monitors certainareas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle.Vehicles that approach and drive past at highspeeds are not detected. No visual noraudible warnings are emitted and the systemdoes not brake the vehicle to correct yourcourse.

Driving systems 193

Drivingandparking

Z

If the lanes are very wide, it may not bepossible to monitor the complete width of theneighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles inthe next lane may not be detected, especiallyif they are driving in a staggered formation.This may be the case if vehicles are driving atthat edge of their lane which is furthest awayfrom your vehicle.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 10 ft(3 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.For this purpose, Active Blind Spot Assistuses radar sensors in the rear bumper.

If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.

Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error whendriving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when drivingalongside long vehicles, for examplelorries, for a prolonged time.

Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensorsare integrated into the front and rear bumpersrespectively. An additional radar sensor islocated behind the cover in the radiator grill.Make sure that the sensors and areas aroundthem are free of dirt, ice or slush. The rearsensors must not be covered, for example bycycle racks or overhanging cargo. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage tothe bumpers, have the function of the sensorschecked at a qualified specialist workshop.Blind Spot Assist may otherwise not workproperly.

Indicator and warning displayG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist is not active at speedsbelow 20 mph (30km/h). The indicator lampsin the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,indicator lamp: in the exteriormirrors lightsup yellow at speeds of up to

194 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above20 mph(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goesout and Active Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on thecorresponding side lights up red. Thiswarningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph(12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Active BlindSpot Assist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Visual and audible collision warningsG WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aiddesigned to assist driving. It is not a substitutefor attentive driving. In some cases, thecourse-correcting brake application is notsufficient to avoid a collision. In such a case,you must steer, brake or accelerate.In very rare cases, the system mayerroneously detect a danger of collision in thearea of crash barriers or similar lane bordersand apply the brakes. Active Blind Spot Assistdoes not detect all traffic situations and roadusers. Always make sure that there issufficient distance on the side for other trafficor obstacles. An inappropriate brakeapplication may be interrupted at any time ifyou steer slightly in the opposite direction oraccelerate.You are responsible for driving at appropriatespeeds, braking in good time, and steeringcorrectly. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weatherconditions. Always pay attention to trafficconditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,you may fail to recognize dangers in time,

cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.

If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between20 mph(30 km/h) and120 mph(200 km/h).If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp: flashes in theexterior mirror and the following is shown inthe multifunction display, for example:

There will be either no or only a weak course-correcting brake application if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crashbarriers, located on both sides of yourvehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at theside.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP® or PRE-SAFE® Brake.RESP® is switched off.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire isdetected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that the radar sensor system(Y page 213) and Active Blind Spot Assist

Driving systems 195

Drivingandparking

Z

(Y page 210) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Active Lane Keeping Assist

Important safety notesG WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not keepyour vehicle in its lane. It is only an aid andmay detect the lane markings on the roadincorrectly or not at all.The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rseveral or no lanemarkings for a single laneare present.Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due toinsufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or spray.Rthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun, or reflection from other vehicles.Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up orcovered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the camera.Rthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snow.Rthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetected.Rthe lane markings on the road are unclear,e.g. near roadworks.Rthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormerge.Rthe road is narrow and winding.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot detectroad and traffic conditions. It is not asubstitute for attentive driving. You areresponsible for the vehicle's speed, braking ingood time, and steering correctly. Always

adapt your driving style to suit the prevailingroad and weather conditions. Always payattention to traffic conditions and yoursurroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

Active Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areain front of your vehicle by means of a camerabehind the top of the windshield. Active LaneKeeping Assist detects lane markings on theroad and warns you before you leave yourlane unintentionally. If you do not react to thewarning, a lane-correcting application of thebrakes can bring the vehicle back into theoriginal lane.

: Active Lane Keeping Assist camera

If you select kmkm on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function (Y page 211), Active Lane KeepingAssist is activated starting at a speed of60 km/h. If the milesmiles display unit is selected,the assistance range begins at 40 mph.

Warning vibration in the steering wheelA warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn youby means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.

196 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. afreeway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

Lane-correcting brake applicationG WARNINGActive Lane Keeping Assist does not keepyour vehicle in its lane. It is only an aiddesigned to assist driving. It is not a substitutefor attentive driving. In some cases, the lane-correcting brake application is not sufficientto bring your vehicle back to the original lane.In such cases, you must steer the vehicleyourself to ensure that it does not leave thelane.Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detectroad and traffic conditions. Always make surethat there is sufficient distance to the side forother traffic or obstacles. In rare cases,unclear markings or particular structures onthe roadway can be recognized as solid lanemarkings. An inappropriate brake application,e.g. after intentionally driving over a solid lanemarking, may be interrupted at any time bysteering slightly in the opposite direction.Active Lane Keeping Assist cannot takeweather conditions into account.You are responsible for the driving atappropriate speeds, braking in good time, andsteering correctly. Always adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing road and weatherconditions. Always pay attention to trafficconditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,you may fail to recognize dangers in time,cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.

If you leave your lane under certaincircumstances the vehicle will brake briefly

on one side. This is meant to assist you inbringing the vehicle back to the original lane.This function is available in the range between40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and200 km/h).A lane-correcting brake application can onlybe made after driving over a solid,recognizable lane marking. Before this, awarning must be given by means ofintermittent vibration in the steering wheel.In addition, a lane with lane markings on bothsides must be recognized. The brakeapplication also slightly reduces vehiclespeed.If a lane-correcting brake application occurs,the following, for example, appears in themultifunction display:

i A further lane-correcting brakeapplication can only occur after yourvehicle has returned to the original lane.

No lane-correcting brake application occursif:Ryou clearly and actively steer, brake oraccelerate.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.Ryou switch on the turn signals.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving stylewithhigh cornering speeds or high rates ofacceleration.RESP® is switched off.Rthe transmission is not in position D.Ra loss of tire pressure or a defective tire hasbeen detected and displayed.

Driving systems 197

Drivingandparking

Z

Active Lane Keeping Assist does not detecttraffic situations or road users. Aninappropriate brake application may beinterrupted at any time if you:Rsteer slightly in the opposite direction.Ruse a turn signal.Rclearly brake or accelerate.A lane-correcting brake application isinterrupted automatically if:Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ESP®, PRE-SAFE® Brake or Active BlindSpot Assist.Rlanemarkings can no longer be recognized.

Switching on Active Lane Keeping Assist

X Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive(Y page 210).Symbol: appears in the multifunctiondisplay.If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,symbol: is shown in green. Active LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.If StandardStandard is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, suchas ABS, BAS or ESP®.

If AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:

Ryou have switched on the turn signals. Inthis event, the warnings are suppressedfor a certain period of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoidan obstacle or change lane quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.

198 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Useful information ............................ 200Important safety notes .................... 200Displays and operation .................... 200Menus and submenus ...................... 203Display messages ............................. 218Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 245

199

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe driver's concentration must always bedirected primarily at road traffic.For your safety and the safety of others,selecting features through the multifunctionsteering wheel should only be done by thedriver when traffic and road conditions permitit to be done safely.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 feet (approximately 14m) persecond.

G WARNINGNo messages will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the multifunctiondisplay is inoperative.As a result, you will not be able to seeinformation about your driving conditions,such asRspeedRoutside temperatureRwarning/indicator lampsRmalfunction/warning messagesRfailure of any systemsDriving characteristics may be impaired.

If youmust continue to drive, do sowith addedcaution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

G WARNINGMalfunction and warning messages are onlydisplayed for certain systems and areintentionally not very detailed. Themalfunction and warning messages aresimply a reminder with respect to theoperation of certain systems. They do notreplace the owner's and/or driver'sresponsibility to maintain the vehicle'soperating safety. Have all requiredmaintenance services and safety checksperformed on the vehicle. Bring the vehicle toan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center toaddress the malfunction and warningmessages.

G WARNINGAll categories of messages contain importantinformation which should be taken note ofand, where a malfunction is indicated,addressed as soon as possible at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Failure to repair the condition noted maycause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in propertydamage or personal injury.

For an illustration of the instrument cluster,see (Y page 29).

Displays and operation

Instrument lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicleinterior can be adjusted using the brightnesscontrol knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 29).

200 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Turn the brightness control knob clockwiseor counter-clockwise.If the light switch is set toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids whichmay have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire. Youcould be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can causeserious burnswhich can occur just by openingthe engine hood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away fromother traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the left-hand side.Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolanttemperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over248‡(120†), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

TachometerThe red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.

! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayThe outside temperature display is in themultifunction display (Y page 203).

G WARNINGThe outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 165):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 167):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

OverviewThe on-board computer is activated as soonas you turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock.You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer using

Displays and operation 201

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

the buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

: Multifunction display; To switch on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back button

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the AudioAudio menu: selects astored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the AudioAudio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the AudioAudio menu: stops thestation search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

202 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem; see the separateoperating instructionsRHides display messages/callsup the last TripTrip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Multifunction displayValues and settings as well as displaymessages are shown in the multifunctiondisplay.

Example: multifunction display for automatictransmission: Description field; Menu bar= Drive program? TimeA Permanent display: outside temperature

or speed (Y page 212)B Transmission positionX To show the menu bar;: press the= or; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar; disappears after a few seconds.Text field: shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

i You can set the time using the audiosystem or COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 184)CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 165)_ Adaptive high-beam Assist

(Y page 114)À ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 188)¤ ECO start/stop function

(Y page 144)Ã Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 191) or

Active Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 196)

ë HOLD function (Y page 178)Ä PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewOperating the on-board computer(Y page 201).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 204)RNaviNavi menu (navigation details)(Y page 205)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 206)RTelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 207)RDriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 209)RServ.Serv. menu (Y page 211)RSett.Sett. menu (Y page 211)RAMGAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 215)The AudioAudio, NaviNavi and TelTelmenus differ slightlyin vehicles with an audio system and invehicles with COMAND. The examples given

Menus and submenus 203

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

in this Operator's Manual apply to vehiclesequipped with COMAND.

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey, whilstthe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 205).The From StartFrom Start trip computer isautomatically reset if:

RThe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer isautomatically reset if the value exceeds9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thecurrent fuel consumption and theapproximate range (except for AMGvehicles).

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amountof fuel left in the fuel tank, the display showsa vehicle being refueledC instead of therange.

ECO display

Example: ECO displayX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectECO DISPLAYECO DISPLAY.

204 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will beautomatically reset.For further information on the ECO display,see (Y page 161).

Digital speedometer

: Digital speedometerX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the followingfunctions:Rtrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computerRECO display

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. For moreinformation, see the separate operatinginstructions.X Switch on the audio system with Becker®MAP PILOT or COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current street

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current street? Symbol "follow the road's course"

Menus and submenus 205

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction icon

When a change of direction has beenannounced, you will see visual distancedisplay; next to the symbol for change ofdirection=. This shortens from the bottomto the top of the display as you approach thepoint of the announced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= New lane during a change of direction? Uninterrupted laneA Lane recommendationB Change-of-direction icon

On multilane roads, the system can displaylane recommendationA for the next changeof direction. During the change of direction,additional lanes may be displayed.Lane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

Other status indicators of thenavigation systemRO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route:calculating a new routeROff MapOff Map or OffOff MappedMapped RoadRoad: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo RouteNo Route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio stationi SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

i For information on switching wavebandand storing stations; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select Radio (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position

206 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.

X To select a station from the stationlist: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the stationsearch: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

Operating audio player or audio mediaAudio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on theequipment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select the audio player or medium; seethe separate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

Display CD/DVD changer (example): Current titleX To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desired track hasbeen reached.

If you press and hold9 or:, the rapidscrolling speed is increased. Not all audiodrives or data carriers support this function.If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and name of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operationX Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

Display CD/DVD changer (example): Current sceneX To select the next/previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desired scenehas been reached.

Telephone menu

IntroductionYou can establish a Bluetooth® connection tothe audio system or to COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions).

G WARNINGThe driver's attention to the roadmust alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or taking atelephone call. If you choose to use thetelephonewhile driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone whenroad, weather and traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle coversa distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)every second.

Menus and submenus 207

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

X Switch on the mobile phone and audiosystem or COMAND; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

You will see one of the following displaymessages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a callIf someone calls you when you are in theTelTel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display, for example:

X Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

You can accept a call even if you are not inthe TelTel menu.Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the TelTel menu.Dialing a number from the phone bookX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe9 or: button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~ or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX If you do not want to make a call: pressthe~ or% button.

208 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu, you have thefollowing options:Rshow the distance display (Y page 209)Ractivate/deactivate ESP®(Y page 209)Ractivate/deactivate the PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 210)Ractivate/deactivate ATTENTION ASSIST(Y page 210)Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist orActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 210)Ractivate/deactivate Lane Keeping Assist orActive Lane Keeping Assist (Y page 210)

Showing the distance displayThis function is only available withDISTRONIC PLUS.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Assist.Assist.menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectDistance DisplayDistance Display.

X Press thea button.The DISTRONIC PLUS distance display(Y page 174) appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

If the Sensors DeactivatedSensors Deactivated messageappears, the radar sensor system isdeactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system(Y page 213).

Deactivating/activating ESP®

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

Activating/deactivating ESP® on AMGvehicles (Y page 66).For further information about ESP®, see(Y page 64).X Start the engine.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectESPESP.

X Press thea button.X To deactivate: pressa again.The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

X To activate: pressa again.The å warning lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the åwarning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelObserve the information on warning lamps(Y page 249).Observe the information on displaymessages(Y page 219).

Menus and submenus 209

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectPRE-SAFE BrakePRE-SAFE Brake.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

When PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68) isactivated, the multifunction display showstheÄ symbol as long as the HOLDfunction is not activated (Y page 178).Vehicles with Parking Guidance: ifPARKTRONIC is activated and you are drivingat a speed below 22 mph(35 km/h), thejParking Guidance symbol is shown instead oftheÄ symbol.If the PRE-SAFE Brake: SensorsPRE-SAFE Brake: SensorsDeactivatedDeactivated message appears, the radarsensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system(Y page 213).

For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 68).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectAttention AssistAttention Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

When ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 188) isactivated, theÀ symbol appears in themultifunction display when the ignition is on.For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 188).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot AsstBlind Spot Asst.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

If the Blind Spot Assist SensorsBlind Spot Assist SensorsDeactivatedDeactivated or Act. Blind Spot Asst.Act. Blind Spot Asst.Sensors DeactivatedSensors Deactivated message appears,the radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system(Y page 213).

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 189).For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 189).

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectLane Keep. Asst.Lane Keep. Asst.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set OffOff,StandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

210 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

When Lane Keeping Assist or Active LaneKeeping Assist is activated, theà symbolappears in themultifunction display when theignition is on.For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 191).For further information about Active LaneKeeping Assist, see (Y page 196).

Service menu

In the Serv.Serv. menu, you have the followingoptions:Rcalls up display messages (Y page 218)RRestart the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Canada only) (Y page 325)RCheck tire pressure electronically(Y page 326)RCall up when a service is due(Y page 286)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the Sett.Sett. menu, you have the followingoptions:Rchange the instrument cluster settings(Y page 211)Rchange the light settings (Y page 212)Rchange the vehicle settings (Y page 213)

Rchange the convenience settings(Y page 214)Rrestore the factory settings (Y page 215)

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement fordistanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whethercertain displays appear in kilometers or milesin the multifunction display.You can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInst. ClusterInst. Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement fordistance applies to:Rthe digital speedometer in the TripTrip menuRodometer and the trip odometerRtrip computerRcurrent consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the NaviNavimenuRcruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

Menus and submenus 211

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInst. ClusterInst. Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent Display:Permanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting OutsideOutsideTemperatureTemperature or Speedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h](USA)/Speedometer [mph]Speedometer [mph] (Canada).

X Press thea button to save the setting.

i The speed is shown in km/h (USA)/mph(Canada).

Lights

Switching the daytime running lamps on/offi This function is not available in Canada.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDay LightsDay Lights function.If the Day LightsDay Lights function has beenswitched on, the cone of light and theW symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in red.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 111).

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAdapt. HighbeamAdapt. Highbeam function.If the Adapt.Adapt. HighbeamHighbeam function has beenswitched on, the cone of light and the_ symbol in the upper multifunctiondisplay are shown in red.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

For further information about AdaptiveHighbeam Assist, see (Y page 114).

Activating/deactivating surroundlighting and exterior lighting delayedswitch-offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theSurround LightingSurround Lighting function.When the Surround LightingSurround Lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the areaaround the vehicle are displayed in red inthe multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of theexterior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn theSmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.

212 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

If you have activated the SurroundSurroundLightingLighting function and the light switch is settoÃ, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 111).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for60 seconds after the engine is switched off.If you close all the doors and the trunk lid,the exterior lighting goes off after5 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, thefollowing light up:RParking lampsRFront fog lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offIf you activate the Light. DelayLight. Delay function,the interior lighting remains on for20 seconds after you remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theLight. DelayLight. Delay function.When the Light. DelayLight. Delay function isactivated, the vehicle interior is displayedin red in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Door LocksAuto. Door Locks function.When the Auto. Door LocksAuto. Door Locks function isactivated, the vehicle doors are displayedin red in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you activate the Auto. Door LocksAuto. Door Locksfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 82).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.If the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunctiondisplay lights up red.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

Menus and submenus 213

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to selectRadar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

The following systems are switched off whenthe radar sensor system is deactivated:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167)RBAS PLUS (Y page 63)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68)RActive Blind Spot Assist (Y page 193)

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGYou must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment lever or press oneof the memory position buttons.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver's door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exitfeature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/Exit:Easy Entry/Exit: function.If the Easy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function isactivated, the vehicle steering wheel isdisplayed in red in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 102).

Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function.When the Belt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function isactivated, the vehicle seat belt is displayedin red in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

For further information on belt adjustment,see (Y page 54).

Switching the fold-in mirrors whenlocking feature on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe memory function (Y page 106).This function is only available in Canada.When you activate the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function, the exterior mirrors arefolded in when the vehicle is locked. If youunlock the vehicle and then open a door, theexterior mirrors fold out again.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAuto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in red in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you have switched the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function on and you fold the exteriormirrors in using the button on the door(Y page 104), they will not fold out

214 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

automatically. The exterior mirrors can thenonly be folded out using the button on thedoor.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett.Sett. menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingFactory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to selectNoNo or YesYes.

X Press thea button to confirm theselection.If you have selected YesYes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Day LightsDay Lights functionin the LightsLights submenu is only reset if thevehicle is stationary.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displaysX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperature

Upshift indicator UPUP= indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.

Upshift indicator UPUP= fades out othermessages until you have shifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡(80 †) the oil temperature is shown in blue.Avoid driving at full engine output during thistime.

SETUPSETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode and theSPORT handling mode.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

: Drive program (CC/SS+SS+/MM); ESP® mode (ONON/OFFOFF) or SPORT handling

mode (SPORTSPORT)RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERG WARNINGThe RACETIMER feature is only for use onroads and in conditions where high speeddriving is permitted. Racing on public roads isprohibited under all circumstances. The driveris and must always remain responsible forfollowing posted speed limits.

You can use the RACETIMER to store laptimes.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

Menus and submenus 215

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

i If the RACETIMER is selected, the=and; buttons cannot be used to call upthe menu bar.

: Lap; RACETIMER

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. TimeInterm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lapX Pressa to confirm New LapNew Lap.

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= Lap

i It is possible to store a maximum ofsixteen laps. The 16th lap can only becompleted with Finish LapFinish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMERX Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Pressa to confirm YesYes.The RACETIMER interrupts timing when youstop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn theSmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then pressa to confirm StartStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset LapReset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all lapsIf you switch off the engine, the RACETIMERis reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm ResetReset.Reset Race-Timer?Reset Race-Timer? appears in themultifunction display.

216 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statisticsThis function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

Lap statisticsThis function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until thelap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashingsymbol:.

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lapX Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

Menus and submenus 217

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes inthis Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on the HOLD function(Y page 178) and parking (Y page 158).

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for themessages have been remedied.

Message memoryThemessage memory allows you to call up previous display messages.X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

218 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function andhill start assist are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.

Display messages 219

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsThe braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable dueto a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Release ParkingRelease ParkingBrakeBrake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.

220 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Brake ImmediatelyBrake Immediately

A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function orDISTRONIC PLUS is active.A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lockthe vehicle, the tone becomes louder.You cannot start the engine.X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress thebrake pedal firmly and hold until the display messagedisappears.

X Use the folding wheel chock (Y page 303), from the vehicle toolkit to secure the vehicle against rolling away.You can restart the engine.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperativembrace Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system aremalfunctioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEInoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

Display messages 221

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctionsFunctionsCurrently LimitedCurrently LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

PRE-SAFE® Brake is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper(Y page 295).

X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 66).

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions LimitedFunctions LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUSor the distance warning signal may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,see (Y page 39).

222 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6Front LeftFront LeftMalfunctionMalfunctionServiceServiceRequiredRequiredorFrontFrontRight MalfunctionRight MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear LeftRear LeftMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Rear RightRear RightMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear CenterRear CenterMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lampalso lights up in the instrument cluster.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Right SideRight SideCurtain AirbagCurtain AirbagMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand windowcurtain air bag.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 223

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag EnabledAirbag EnabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger air bag is enabled during the journey, eventhough:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than thesystem's weight threshold is located on the front-passengerseat.orRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupied.The system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe air bag may deploy unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the 45 indicator lamp in the center console andthe multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If theindicator lamp is on, OCS (Occupant Classification System) hasdisabled the front-passenger air bag (Y page 45).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Enabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Enabled SeeOperator'sOperator's ManualManual displaymessagemust not be shown in themultifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

224 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsIf these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains litor goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 45).

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger air bag is disabled during the journey, eventhough:Ran adultorRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat.

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system mayinterpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger air bag does not deploy during an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the 45 indicator lamp in the center console andthe multifunction display and check the following:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe 45 indicator lamp must light up and remain lit. If theindicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger airbag (Y page 45).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator'sOperator's ManualManual displaymessagemust not be shown in themultifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

Display messages 225

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsIf these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the 45 indicator lamp remains litor goes out depends on how OCS classifies the occupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 45).

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck LeftCheck LeftCornering LightCornering Light orCheck RightCheck RightCornering LightCornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight Low BeamRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

226 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left Tailand Brakeand BrakeLampsLampsorCheck RightCheck RightTail and BrakeTail and BrakeLampsLamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeamorCheck RightCheck RightHigh BeamHigh Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left FogCheck Left FogLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Fog LampRight Fog Lamp

The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bRear Fog LampRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 227

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParking LampParking Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft ReverseReverseLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Reverse LampRight Reverse Lamp

The left or right-hand backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightRunning Light orCheck RightCheck RightDaytime RunningDaytime RunningLightLight

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 117).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive HeadlampsActive HeadlampsInoperativeInoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

228 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now AvailableAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message isdisplayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

Display messages 229

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel SeeLevel SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 290).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

230 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Eng. OilCheck Eng. OilLev. When NextLev. When NextRefuelingRefueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 289).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 289).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

Display messages 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add 1(Add 1 quart)quart)

AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 289).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 289).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistAttention AssistInoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

232 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 178).

The HOLD function is deactivated. When the brake pedal is firmlydepressed, an activation condition is not fulfilled.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the activation conditions for the HOLD function(Y page 178).

Radar SensorsRadar SensorsDeactivated SeeDeactivated SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 213).

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manualor Active LaneActive LaneKeeping AssistKeeping AssistCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is deactivatedand temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is operationalagain.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Clean the windshield.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssistAssistInoperativeInoperative orActive LaneActive LaneKeeping AssistKeeping AssistInoperativeInoperative

Lane Keeping Assist or Active Lane Keeping Assist is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 233

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manualor Active LaneActive LaneKeeping AssistKeeping AssistCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Clean the sensors (Y page 295).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative orActive Blind SpotActive Blind SpotAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking GuidanceParking GuidanceInoperativeInoperative

Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 184).X Restart the engine.If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

234 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Parking GuidanceParking GuidanceCanceledCanceled

Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes are:Rthe vehicle is skidding.Rthe sensors are dirty.Ra malfunction has occurred.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 184).If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunctiondisplay at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):X Clean the sensors (Y page 295).X Restart the engine.If the parking space symbol still does not appear in themultifunction display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longerfollowing the recommended path.X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messagesin the multifunction display.

Parking GuidanceParking GuidanceFinishedFinished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 167). If it wasdeactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONICDISTRONIC PLUSPLUS NowNowAvailableAvailable

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having beentemporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 167).

Display messages 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.RThe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper(Y page 295).

X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative DISTRONIC PLUS is defective. BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake

may also have failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSPassivePassive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS--- mph--- mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 167).

236 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control--- mph--- mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control(Y page 165).

Display messages 237

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

CheckCheckTire Pressure SoonTire Pressure Soon

The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301).X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tirepressure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tirepressure is correct (Y page 325).

CheckCheck TireTire PressurePressureThen Restart RunThen Restart RunFlat IndicatorFlat Indicator

The tire pressure loss warning system generated a displaymessage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 325).

Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat IndicatorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire pressuresTire pressureswill be displayedwill be displayedafter driving aafter driving afew minutesfew minutes

The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure.X Drive on.The tire pressures appear in the multifunction display after youhave been driving for a few minutes.

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

238 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorInoperative NoInoperative NoWheel SensorsWheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

CheckCheckTiresTires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 326).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

WarningWarningTire MalfunctionTire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.RYou could lose control of the vehicle.RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301).

Display messages 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

CorrectCorrectTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 326).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 329).

TirePress.TirePress.Sensor(s)MissingSensor(s)Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

TireTire Press.Press. MonitorMonitorCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

hTire PressureTire PressureWarning TireWarning TireMalfunctionMalfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.RYou could lose control of the vehicle.RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301).

240 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

hCheckCheck TireTire PressurePressure

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 326).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

hCorrect TireCorrect TirePressurePressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 326).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ShiftShift toto 'P''P' oror 'N''N'to Start Engineto Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

PPShift to 'P'Shift to 'P'

You have attempted to stop the engine with the Start/Stop buttonwhile the transmission was not in position P.X Shift the transmission to position P.

Display messages 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt orRswitched off the engine orRopened the hoodA tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lockthe vehicle, the tone becomes louder.You cannot start the engine.X Shift the transmission to position P.You can restart the engine.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.X Close all the doors.

_RearRear LeftLeft BackrestBackrestNot LatchedNot Latched orRear RightRear RightBackrest NotBackrest NotLatchedLatched

The backrest in the rear is not engaged on the left-hand and/orright-hand side.X Push the backrest back until it engages.

242 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÐPower SteeringPower SteeringMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No ServicePhone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 290).

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂRemove KeyRemove Key

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂReplaceReplace KeyKey BatteryBattery

The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 77).

Display messages 243

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂDon't Forget YourDon't Forget YourKeyKey

The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds andis only a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when youleave the vehicle.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).(Y page 158).

X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is runningbecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(white displaymessage)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GOfunctions in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂKey Detected inKey Detected inVehicleVehicle

The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle duringlocking.X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.

244 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂRemove 'Start'Remove 'Start'Button and InsertButton and InsertKeyKey

The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. Awarning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂClose Doors toClose Doors toLock VehicleLock Vehicle

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, awarning tone soundsfor up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).The warning tone ceases.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp lights upafter the engine starts,as soon as the driver'sor the front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 245

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp flashesand an intermittentaudible warningsounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thecar is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 54).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The car is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

246 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Do not add brake fluid. Topping up will not remedy themalfunction.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLD function andhill start assist are therefore also deactivated, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatictransmission, will not be available.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 247

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD(electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®,PRE-SAFE®Brake, theHOLD function, hill start assist are thereforealso deactivated, for example.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

248 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)֌!

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 249

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

֊

The yellow ESP®warning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 64).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 64).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M

AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORThandling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with theconditions written in the "Activating/deactivating SPORThandling mode" section (Y page 66).

250 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

÷äå

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction and hill start assist are not available due to amalfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist aretemporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 251

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the vehicle ismoving. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake.The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem).

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,see (Y page 39).

252 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe running in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as the yellowCheck Enginewarninglamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect inthese states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion. In addition,the; Check Enginewarning lamp may lightup.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 253

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

?

The red coolantwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning and the coolanttemperature gauge isat the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

254 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may bemalfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 290). Observethe warning notes.

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.The engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Allow the engine and coolant to cool.X Check the coolant level and add coolant (Y page 290). Observethe warning notes.

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nextqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 255

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into theengine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening theengine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of thevehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

! If the coolant temperature is over 248 ‡ (120†), do not continue driving. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion. A warning tonealso sounds.

G WARNINGYou are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.There is a risk of an accident.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

More information about DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 167) andPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 68).

256 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.Canada only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 158).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 301).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 326).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 257

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

258

Useful information ............................ 260Loading guidelines ............................ 260Stowage areas .................................. 260Features ............................................. 265

259

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGAlways fasten items being carried as securelyas possible using fastening materialsappropriate for the weight and size of theload.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose itemswill be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whentransporting cargo. Do not pile luggage orcargo higher than the seat backrests.The trunk is the preferred place to carryobjects. Do not place anything on the rear-window shelf.Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open.Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases mayenter vehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.

The handling characteristics of a ladenvehicle are dependent on the distribution ofthe load within the vehicle. For this reason,you should observe the following notes whentransporting a load:Rwhen transporting a load, never exceed themaximum permissible gross vehicle weight

or the gross axle weight rating of thevehicle (including occupants). The valuesare specified on the vehicle identificationplate on the B-pillar of the driver's door.Rposition heavy loads as far forwards aspossible and as low down in the trunk aspossible.Rthe loadmust not protrude above the upperedge of the seat backrests.Ralways place the load against the rear orfront seat backrests. Make sure that theseat backrests are securely locked intoplace.Ralways place the load behind unoccupiedseats if possible.Rsecure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie-downs. pad sharp edgesfor protection.

Stowage areas

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGTo help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whenstoring objects in the vehicle. Put luggage orcargo in the trunk if possible.Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than theseat backrests.Keep compartment lids closed. This will helpto prevent stored objects from being thrownabout and injuring vehicle occupants duringRbrakingRvehicle maneuversRan accident

260 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.

X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it 90° clockwise to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it 90° counter-clockwiseto position1.

i The glove box can be cooled(Y page 136).

Eyeglasses compartmentThere is a compartment to stow eyeglassesin the headliner on the driver's side.

X To open: pull down eyeglassescompartment: by the handle.

Stowage compartment under the armrest

X To open: press left-hand button; or right-hand button:.The stowage compartment opens.

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, aUSB connection and an AUX IN connectionor a Media Interface are installed in thestowage compartment. A Media Interfaceis a universal interface for mobile audioequipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3 player(see the separate COMAND OperatingInstructions).

Stowage areas 261

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stowage compartment under the frontseats

X To open: pull handle: up and foldcover; forwards.

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage compartment in the rear! Do not sit or lean your bodyweight on thearmrests when they are folded out as youcould damage them.

! Close the cover of the stowagecompartment before folding the rear seatarmrest back into the seat backrest.

X To open: fold down seat armrest;.X Fold cover: of the armrest upwards.

Stowage pocketsG WARNINGStorage bags are intended for storing light-weight items only.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges orfragile objects may not be transported in the

storage bag. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Storage bags cannot protect transportedgoods in the event of an accident.

The stowage pockets are on the back of thedriver's and front-passenger's seats.

Stowage net

G WARNINGParcel nets are intended for storing light-weight items only, such as road maps, mail,etc.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, orfragile objects may not be transported in theparcel nets. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Parcel nets cannot protect transported goodsin the event of an accident.

Stowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the left-hand sideof the trunk.

Rear bench seat through-loadingfeature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen expanding the cargo volume, alwaysfold the seat backrests fully forward.Unless you are transporting cargo, the seatbackrests must remain properly locked in theupright position.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose itemswill be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.

262 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Always use the cargo tie-down rings.

The left-hand and right-hand rear seatbackrests can be folded down separately toincrease the trunk capacity.

Folding the seat backrest forward

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

X Open the trunk.X Pull right-hand or left-hand rear seatbackrest release handle:.The corresponding rear seat backrest isreleased.

X Fully insert the rear seat backrest headrestraints.

X Fold rear seat backrest; forwards.X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Folding the seat backrest back

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatforward if necessary.

! Make sure that the seat belt does notbecome trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could bedamaged.

X Fold rear seat backrest: back until itengages.

G WARNINGAlways lock the seat backrest in its uprightposition when the rear seat bench isoccupied, or the extended cargo volume is notin use.Check for secure locking by pushing andpulling on the seat backrest.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose itemswill be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whentransporting cargo.

i You should always engage the rear seatbackrests if you do not need the through-loading feature. This will preventunauthorized access to the trunk from thevehicle interior.

Stowage areas 263

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Adjust the head restraints if necessary(Y page 98).

X Move the driver's or front-passenger seatback if necessary.

Securing cargo

Cargo tie-down ringsObserve the following notes on securingloads:Rsecure the load using the cargo tie-downrings.Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to securea load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.Rdo not route tie-downs across sharp edgesor corners.Rpad sharp edges for protection.There are four cargo tie down rings in thetrunk.

Vehicle with through-loading feature in the rearbench seat: Cargo tie-down rings

Bag hook! The bag hook can bear a maximum loadof 11lbs (5kg) and should not be used tosecure a load.

: Bag hook

Stowage well under the trunk floorThe TIREFIT kit, the vehicle tool kit, etc. arelocated in the stowage compartment.

X To open: pull handle: up.

X Hook handle: into rain trough;.

! Unhook the handle before again beforeclosing the trunk lid and clip it in securelyto prevent the handle flap from protruding.Otherwise, you could damage the handle.

264 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Roof carrier

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOnly use roof racks approved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damageto the vehicle.Follow the manufacturer's installationinstructions. Otherwise, an improperlyattached roof rack system or its load couldbecome detached from the vehicle.Do not exceed the maximum roof load of220 lb (100 kg).Take into consideration that when the roofrack is loaded, the handling characteristicsare different from those when operating thevehicle without the roof rack loaded.

! Mercedes-Benz recommends that youonly use roof carriers that have been testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.This helps to prevent damage to thevehicle.Position the load on the roof carrier in sucha way that the vehicle will not sustaindamage even when it is in motion.Depending on the vehicle equipment,ensure that when the roof carrier isinstalled you can:Rraise the sliding sunroof fullyRopen the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel fullyRopen the trunk lid fully

! To avoid damaging or scratching thecovers, do not use metallic or hard objectsto open them.

Attaching the roof carrier

X Open covers: carefully in the direction ofthe arrow.

X Fold covers: upwards.X Only secure the roof carrier to theanchorage points under covers:.

X Observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions.

Features

Cup holders

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIn order to help prevent spilling liquids onvehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,only use containers that fit into the cupholder. Use lids on open containers and donot fill containers to a height where thecontents, especially hot liquids, could spillduring braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in anaccident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupantsmay cause serious personal injury. Liquidsspilled on vehicle equipment may causedamage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.An open cup holder may cause injury to youor others when contacted during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.Keep in mind that objects placed in the cupholder may come loose during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be

Features 265

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objectsthrown around in the vehicle interior maycause an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

Cup holder in the front-compartmentcenter console

: Cup holders

Cup holder in the rear seat armrest! Do not sit on or support your body weighton the rear seat armrest when it is foldeddown, as you could otherwise damage it.

! Close the cup holder before folding therear seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cupholder could be damaged.

X Fold down the rear seat armrest.X To open: raise the rear seat armrest cover.X Press release catch:.Cup holder; folds out forwards.

X Swing the rear seat armrest cover backdown, if necessary.

X To close: raise the rear seat armrest cover.Swing cup holder; back until it engages.

Sun visors

Overview of sun visors

G WARNINGDo not use the vanity mirror while driving.Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visorsclosed while the vehicle is in motion.Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining clip, e.g. for a car park ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into retainer; and mirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the sideX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.

266 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Pull or push the sun visor in the direction ofthe arrow.

Roller sunblinds on the rear sidewindows! Always guide the roller sunblind by hand.Do not let it snap back suddenly as thiswould damage the automatic rollermechanism.

! Do not drive the vehicle with the rollersunblind hooked in and the side windowsopened simultaneously. The roller sunblindcan jump out of the retainers and springback suddenly when driving at high speeds,e.g. when driving on the freeway. This coulddamage the inertia reel. Therefore, eitherclose the side window or retract the rollersunblind before driving at high speeds.

X To extend: pull the roller sunblind out bytab: and hook it onto retainers; at thetop of the window.

Rear window roller sunblind (Sedan)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured throughexcessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accidentwithvehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGWhen adjusting a roller sunblind, the rollerblind moves up or down. You might becometrapped in the process.In the event of danger, briefly press the buttonfor the roller sunblind to change the rollerblind's direction of movement.

Extending/retracting the rollersunblind! Make sure that the roller sunblind canmove freely. Otherwise, the roller sunblindor other objects could be damaged.

Features 267

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To extend or retract: briefly pressbutton:.The roller sunblind fully extends or fullyretracts.

Ashtray

Front ashtray! The stowage space under the ashtray isnot heat resistant. Before placing litcigarettes in the ashtray, make sure thatthe ashtray is properly engaged.Otherwise,the stowage space could be damaged.

i You can remove the ashtray insert anduse the resulting compartment forstowage.

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X To remove the insert: hold insert= bythe ribbing at the sides and lift it up; andout.

X To re-install the insert: press insert=into the holder until it engages.

X To close: briefly press cover: at thefront.The cover moves back.

Rear-compartment ashtray

X To open: pull cover; out by its top edge.X To remove the insert: press releasebutton= and lift the insert up and out.

X To install the insert: install insert: fromabove into the holder and press down intothe holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured throughexcessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accidentwithvehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from the

268 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

ignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGNever touch the heating element or sides ofthe lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold theknob only.Make sure any children traveling with you donot injure themselves or start a fire with thehot cigarette lighter.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

X To open: slide cover: forwards until itengages.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.

X To close: briefly press cover: at thefront.The cover moves back.

12 V sockets

General notesThe sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).Accessories include such items as lamps orchargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 141).

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

Socket in the rear-compartment centerconsole

X Pull cover; out by its top edge.X Lift up the cover of socket:.

115 V socket

G WARNINGThe 115 V AC power socket operates on highvoltage. Use the 115 V AC power socket inthe vehicle with the same caution and carethat you would take with power sockets athome. Keep fluids away from the 115 V ACpower socket. Do not use liquids or sharp

Features 269

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

tools to clean the power socket. Keep thecover of the 115 V AC power socket closedwhen not in use. Otherwise, you could sufferan electric shock and be seriously or evenfatally injured.

G WARNINGAny device that you connect must have asuitable plug and meet U.S. standards. Neverpull at a cable to disconnect a plug from a115VACpower socket. Never use a damagedconnection cable. The 115 V AC power socketmust never be connected to another 115 VAC power source. Do not use a converter withan earthed plug for the 115 V AC powersocket. This could cause serious injury to youand/or other people.

G WARNINGIf the 115 V AC power socket is damaged orpulled out of the trim, do not use or touch the115 V AC power socket. The use of a 115 VAC power socket that has been damaged orpulled out of the trim could cause seriousinjury to you or others.

115 V power socket: provides analternating voltage of 115 V so that smallelectronic devices can be connected. Thesedevices, such as games consoles, chargersand laptops, should not consume more thana maximum of 150 W altogether.

Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe plug of the electronic device is pluggedinto 115 V power socket:.Rthe maximum wattage of the device to beconnected must not exceed 150 W.Rthe on-board power supply is within apermissible voltage range.Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartmentare operational (Y page 269).

X Open flap=.X Switch on the ignition.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into115 V power socket:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If indicator lamp; does not light up, readmore in the section on malfunctions.

X To turn off: disconnect the plug from115 V power socket:.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

Possible causes of malfunctions:Rthe on-board power supply is not within apermissible voltage range.Rthe temperature of the DC/AC converter istemporarily too high.Rsome small electronic devices have aconstant nominal power of less than150 W, but a very high switch-on current.These devices will not work. If you connectsuch a device, 115 V power socket: willnot supply it with power.

If indicator lamp; still does not light up,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

mbrace

Important safety notes! A license agreement must exist in orderto activate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,and press the ï MB Info call button toregister. If any of the steps mentioned is

270 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

not carried out, the system may not beactivated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephoneassistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center under1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with thembrace service (Canada: TELEAID), a user IDand password will be sent to you by post. USAonly: you can use this password to log ontothe mbrace area under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.The mbrace system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone networkis available for transmitting data to theCustomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is availableRthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during an mbrace call,proceed as follows:X Press theW orX button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of the audiosystem/COMAND.

The mbrace system provides variousservices, e.g.:Rautomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following conditionsoccurs:Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.Rthe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.Rthe indicator lamp in the ï MB-Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.Rthe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- Roadside Assistance call button F

- MB Info call button ïRThe mbrace Inoperativembrace Inoperative or mbracembraceService Not ActivatedService Not Activated messageappears in the multifunction display afterthe system self-diagnosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate asexpected. In the event of an emergency,assistance must be summoned by othermeans.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistancecenter at

Features 271

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf the indicator lamp in the SOS button isflashing continuously and no voiceconnection with the Response center hasbeen established, then the mbrace systemhas not been able to initiate an emergency call(e.g. the relevant mobile phone network is notavailable).The CallCall FailedFailedmessage is displayed in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.Should this occur, assistance must besummoned by other means.

! A license agreement must exist in orderto activate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,and press the ï MB Info call button toregister. If any of the steps mentioned isnot carried out, the system may not beactivated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephoneassistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center under1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

An emergency call is dialed automatically ifan air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually.

As soon as the emergency call has beeninitiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting CallConnecting Call messageappears on the multifunction display.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergencyis transmitted, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicle (asdetermined by the GPS system)Rvehicle identification numberRinformation on serious accidentsShortly after the emergency call has beeninitiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center and the vehicleoccupants. If the vehicle occupants respond,the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter attempts to get more information onthe emergency.

i If there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

Making an emergency callG WARNINGIf you feel at any way in jeopardy when in thevehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,vehicle in a dangerous road location), pleasedo not wait for voice contact after you havepressed the SOS button. Carefully leave thevehicle and move to a safe location. TheResponse Center will automatically contactlocal emergency officials with the vehicle'sapproximate location if they receive anautomatic SOS signal and cannot make voicecontact with the vehicle occupants.

272 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X To initiate an emergency callmanually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call isconcluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp in Roadside Assistance button:flashes while the call is active. TheConnecting CallConnecting Call message appears onthe multifunction display. The audio outputis muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.

If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The display of the audio system orCOMAND shows that an mbrace call isactive. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance center can ascertain the nature ofthe problem (Y page 276).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-Benz technician or organizes for your vehicleto be transported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You may be chargedfor services such as repair work and/ortowing. Further details are available in yourmbrace manual.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate aRoadside Assistance call if:Rthe indicator lamp for RoadsideAssistance call button: is flashingcontinuouslyRno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

Features 273

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center. The indicatorlamp inMB Info call button: flashes whilethe connection is being made. TheConnecting CallConnecting Call message appears onthemultifunction display. The audio systemis muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.If a cellular phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center, for example:Rcurrent location of the vehicleRvehicle identification number

i The display of the audio system orCOMAND shows that an mbrace call isactive. During the call, you can change tothe navigation menu by pressing the NAVIbutton on COMAND, for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance

Center and the vehicle occupants. You canobtain information on how to operate yourvehicle's systems, on the location of thenearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,and on further products and services offeredby Mercedes-Benz USA.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The mbrace system failed to initiate anMB Info call if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton: is flashing continuouslyRno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished

This may be because the correspondingmobile phone network is not available.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, anemergency call will take priority and overrideall other active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended. An emergencycall can only be terminated by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on the multifunctionsteering wheelRthe corresponding button on the audiosystem or on COMAND to end the voice call

274 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i If an mbrace call is initiated, audio outputis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, do so onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and in a safelocation.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDownloading destinations gives you accessto a data bank with over 15 million Points ofInterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be storedin the address book.

i The Destination Download function isavailable if the corresponding mobilephone network is available and datatransfer is possible.

i You can only use the DestinationDownload function if the vehicle isequipped with a navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUSPackage and cannot be purchasedseparately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form of

navigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through thecurrent route section.

Search & Send"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. You can find further information on"Search & Send" in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available. Thevehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance center.The vehicle can be immediately remotelyopened within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote openingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be openedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

Features 275

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone networkis accessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby. The vehicle can then belocked by the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance center.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote closingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be closedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your PIN.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoorsLocked RemotelyLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then attempts to locate the mbracesystem. The Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center contacts you and thelocal law enforcement agency if the vehicleis located. However, only the lawenforcement agency is informed of thelocation of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance center isautomatically informed.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), theCustomer Assistance center can provideimproved support for problems with yourvehicle. During an existing call, vehicle datais transferred to the Customer Assistancecenter. The customer service representativecan use the received data to decide what kindof assistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle iscalled.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the RoadsideRoadsideAssistance ConnectedAssistance Connected message in theCOMAND display. If the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is able to be started,the Request for vehicle diagnosisRequest for vehicle diagnosisreceived. Start vehicle diagnosis?received. Start vehicle diagnosis?message appears in the display.

276 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Press YesYes to confirm the message.X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: PleaseVehicle Diagnosis: Pleaseswitch on ignition.switch on ignition. message appears:turn the key to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X If the Please follow thePlease follow theinstructionsinstructions receivedreceived byby phonephone andandmove your vehicle to a safemove your vehicle to a safeposition.position. message appears: follow theinstructions of the customer servicerepresentative.The message in the display disappears.If you select CancelCancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceledcompletely.The vehicle operating state check begins.Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosisVehicle diagnosisactivatedactivated message appears.

When the check is finished, the SendingSendingvehicle diagnosis data...(Voicevehicle diagnosis data...(Voiceconnection may be interruptedconnection may be interruptedduring data transfer.)during data transfer.) messageappears. The vehicle data can now be sent tothe Customer Assistance center.X Press OKOK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnosis:Vehicle Diagnosis:Transferring data...Transferring data... appears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer servicerepresentative agreed with you, the voiceconnection is re-established after the transferis complete. If necessary, you will becontacted at a later time by another means,e.g. by E-Mail or telephone.Further functions of the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a message

about various special offers at yourworkshop.Rmonthly status information E-Mail on oillevel, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receiveinformation on special offers in the E-Mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 26).Information on roadside assistance(Y page 23).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet. Each route caninclude up to 20way points. When a route hasbeen received by the navigation system,'Route name' has been saved to'Route name' has been saved tomemory card. Do you want to startmemory card. Do you want to startroute guidance?route guidance? appears on the COMANDdisplay. The route is saved to the SD memorycard.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.i If you select NoNo, the saved route can becalled up later in the navigation menu.

X Select StartStart.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND. Further informationcan be found in the "COMAND", "Onlineand Internet services" and "Downloaddestination/route" sections.

Features 277

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle. If thisselected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, amessage will be sent to the CustomerAssistance center. The Customer Assistancecenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.The data which is sent to the CustomerAssistance center contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which wasexceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses theboundaries of the selected areas. You canselect the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude SMS, E-Mail or an automated call.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areassimultaneously. Different settings arepossible for each area.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer servicerepresentative that you wish to activate geofencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bySMS.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger thevehicle's panic alarm via SMS. An alarmsounds and the exterior lighting flashes.Depending on the setting, the panic alarmlasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards, thealarm switches off.

Garage door opener

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBefore programming the integrated remotecontrol to a garage door opener or gateoperator, make sure people and objects areout of the way of the device to preventpotential harm or damage. Whenprogramming a garage door opener, the doormoves up or down. When programming a gateoperator, the gate opens or closes.Do not use the integrated remote control withany garage door opener that lacks safety stopand reverse features as required by U.S.federal safety standards (this includes anygarage door opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage door thatcannot detect an object - signaling the doorto stop and reverse - does not meet currentU.S. federal safety standards.When programming a garage door opener,park vehicle outside the garage.Do not run the engine while programming theintegrated remote control. Inhalation ofexhaust gas is hazardous to your health. Allexhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),and inhaling it can cause unconsciousnessand possible death. All exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it cancause unconsciousness and possible death.

The HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated in the rear-view mirror allows youto operate up to three different door and gatesystems.

278 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garagedoor opener. If you have difficultyprogramming the integrated garage dooropener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the followingtelephone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515(free of charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also availableonline at http://www.homelink.com.

i USA only:This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4

i Canada only:This device complies with the RSS-210Rules of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Programming the integrated garagedoor opener on the rear-view mirror

Programming buttonsG WARNINGOnly press the button on the integratedgarage door opener if there are no persons orobjects present within the sweep of thegarage door. Persons could otherwise beinjured as the door moves.

Integrated garage door opener on the rear-viewmirror

Garage door remote controlA is not part ofthe integrated garage door opener.X Before programming for the first time, clearthe memory of the integrated garage dooropener (Y page 281).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.i Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp: will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote controlAtowards buttons; to? on the rear-view

Features 279

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

mirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to20 cm).i The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might benecessary. You should test every positionfor at least 25 seconds before tryinganother position.

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.If indicator lamp: lights up green orflashes, then programming has beensuccessful.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.

X If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeatthe programming procedure for thecorresponding button on the rear-viewmirror. When doing so, vary the distancebetween remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programming, the garage doorsystem is using a rolling code. Afterprogramming, you must synchronize thegarage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror with the receiver of the garagedoor system.

Synchronizing the rolling codeYour vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.Observe the safety notes when performingthe rolling code synchronization(Y page 278).Observe the safety notes when performingthe rolling code synchronization.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the programming button of the dooror gate drive (see the door or gate drive

operating instructions, e.g. under"Programming of additional remotecontrols").i Usually, you now have 30seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button;,= or? of the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remotecontrolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadianlaw, some U.S. garage door openers aredesigned to "time-out" in the same manner.Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.

280 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.If indicator lamp: turns red, repeat theprocess.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problemsprogramming the integrated garage dooropener on the rear-view mirror, take note ofthe following instructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garagedoor drive remote controlA. This canusually be found on the back of the remotecontrol.The integrated garage door opener iscompatible with devices that have unitswhich operate in the frequency range of280to 433MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases thelikelihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signalto the integrated garage door opener in therear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebutton that you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control for the samegarage door drive is available, repeat thesame programming steps with this remotecontrol. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have beeninstalled in garage door drive remotecontrolA.RNote that some remote controls onlytransmit for a limited amount of time (theindicator lamp on the remote control goes

out). Press buttonB on remote controlA again before transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signalreception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code:indicator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.i The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. Thetransmission is halted after a maximum often seconds and indicator lamp: lightsup yellow. Press button;,= or? againif necessary.

Clearing the memory of the integratedgarage door opener on the rear-viewmirrorX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press buttons; and?.The indicator lamp lights up yellow.

X Press and hold buttons; and? until theindicator lamp turns green.

i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener beforeselling the vehicle.

Features 281

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Compass

Calling up the compassThe compass displays in which compassdirection the vehicle is currently traveling: NN,NENE, EE, SESE, SS, SWSW, WW or NWNW.

To receive a correct display in rear-viewmirror:, the compass must be calibratedand the magnetic field zone set.

Setting the compassX Determine your position using the followingzone maps.

North America zone map

South America zone mapX Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 282) for approximately threeseconds.The zone currently selected appears incompass display;(Y page 282).

X To select the zone: push a round pen intoopening=(Y page 282) until the desiredzone is selected.If, after a few seconds, the display incompass display;(Y page 282) changesdirection, the zone has been selected.

Calibrating the compassX Make sure that there is sufficient space foryou to drive in a circle without impedingtraffic.

In order to calibrate the compass correctly,do the following:Rcalibrate the compass in the open and notin the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage transmission lines.Rswitch off electrical consumers such as theclimate control, windshield wipers or rearwindow defroster.Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.X Switch on the ignition.X Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 282) for approximately six

282 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

seconds, until symbol CC is shown incompass display;(Y page 282).

X Drive your vehicle in a full circle atapproximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph(10 km/h).When the calibration has successfully beencompleted, the current direction is shownin compass display;(Y page 282).

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGWhenever you are using a floormat,make surethere is enough clearance and that thefloormat is securely fastened.The floormat should always be securelyfastened using the fastening equipment.Before driving off, check that the floormat issecurely in place and adjust it if necessary. Aloose floormat could slip and hinder properfunctioning of the pedals.Do not place several floormats on top of eachother as this may impair pedal movement.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in thefootwell.

X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat offretainers;.

X Remove the floormat.

Features 283

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

284

Useful information ............................ 286ASSYST PLUS .................................... 286Engine compartment ........................ 287Care .................................................... 291

285

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 288).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:Next Service A in .. daysNext Service A in .. daysService A DueService A DueService A Exceeded by .. daysService A Exceeded by .. daysThe letter AA or BB, possibly in connection witha number or another letter, shows the type ofservice. AA stands for a minor service and BB fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery isdisconnected.

Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display beforedisconnecting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press the% ora button on thesteering wheel.

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press thet oru button on thesteering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.

X Press thes orr button to select theASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in themultifunction display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service intervaldisplay has been inadvertently reset, thissetting can be corrected at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This mayotherwise lead to increased wear anddamage to the major assemblies or thevehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.

286 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsArduous operating conditions or increasedloads on the vehicle will require some servicework to be performed more often than for avehicle in normal use. Such arduousconditions include regular city driving withfrequent intermediate stops and use inmountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfaces.For example, if the vehicle is used underarduous operating conditions, have air filters,engine oil and oil filters changed frequentlyand check the wheels often. Furtherinformation can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Driving abroadAnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Engine compartment

Hood

Opening the hood

G WARNINGDo not pull the release lever while the vehicleis in motion. Otherwise, the hood could beforced open by passing air flow.This could cause the hood to come loose andinjure you and/or others.

G WARNINGDo not open the hood when the engine isoverheated. You could be seriously injured.Observe the coolant temperature gauge todetermine whether the engine may beoverheated. If you see flames or smokecoming from the engine compartment, move

away from the vehicle. Wait until the enginehas cooled. If necessary, call the firedepartment.

G WARNINGThere is a risk of injury if the hood is open,even if the engine is not running.Some engine components can become veryhot.To avoid the risk of burns, only touch thosecomponents described in the Operator'sManual and observe the relevant safety notes.

G WARNINGTo avoid injury, stay clear of moving partswhen the hood is open and the engine isrunning.The radiator fan may continue to run forapproximately 30seconds ormay even restartafter the engine has been switched off. Forthis reason, you must not reach into the fanrotation area.

G WARNINGThe engine is equipped with a transistorizedignition system. Because of the high voltage,it is dangerous to touch any components(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnosticsocket) of the ignition system:Rwith the engine runningRwhile starting the engineRwhen the ignition is switched on and theengine is turned manually

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

G WARNINGThe windshield wipers and wiper linkagecould be set in motion.When the hood is open, you or others couldbe injured by the wiper linkage.Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off. Remove the SmartKey or makesure that no ignition position has been

Engine compartment 287

Maintenance

andcare

Z

selected with KEYLESS-GO. All indicatorlamps must be off in the instrument panel.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catchhandle; up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood approximately15 inches (40 cm), the hood is opened andheld open automatically by the gas-filledstruts.

Closing the hood

G WARNINGWhen closing the hood, use extreme cautionnot to catch hands or fingers. Be careful thatyou do not close the hood on anyone.Make sure the hood is securely engagedbefore driving off. Do not continue driving if

the hood can no longer engage after anaccident, for example. The hood couldotherwise come loose while the vehicle is inmotion and injure you and/or others.

X Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 inches (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

General notes on oil levelDepending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oilover a distance of 600 miles (1,000 km). Theoil consumptionmay be higher than this whenthe vehicle is new or if you frequently drive athigh engine speeds.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly: wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

288 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

Checking the oil level using the oildipstick

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.To check the oil level with the engine atoperating temperature, switch the engineoff and wait for approximately five minutes.

X Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hotengine parts, it may ignite and you could burnyourself. Do not spill any engine oil on hotengine parts.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with the

Mercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalyticconverter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN markon the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter)of engine oil.

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oildipstick (Y page 289).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 355).

Engine compartment 289

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking the coolant level

G WARNINGIn order to avoid any potentially serious burns:Ruse extreme caution when opening thehood if there are any signs of steam orcoolant leaking from the cooling system, orif the coolant temperature display indicatesthat the coolant is overheated.Rdo not remove the pressure cap on thecoolant reservoir if the coolant temperatureis above 158 ‡ (70†). Allow the engine tocool down before removing the cap. Thecoolant reservoir contains hot fluid and isunder pressure.Rusing a rag, slowly turn the capapproximately 1/2 turn to relieve excesspressure. If opened immediately, scaldinghot fluid and steam will be blown out underpressure.Rdo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol whichmay burn if it comes into contact with hotengine parts.

Only check the coolant level when the vehicleis on a level surface and the engine has cooleddown.X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 141) in the ignition lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 142).

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Slowly turn cap: half a turn counter-clockwise and allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap: further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolantin coolant expansion tank;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap: and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 356).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGWasher solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it mayignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.

290 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

The washer fluid reservoir is used for both thewindshield washer system and the headlampcleaning system.Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 357).

Brake fluid level! If you notice that the brake fluid level inthe brake fluid reservoir has fallen to theMIN mark or less, check the brake systemimmediately for leaks. Also check thethickness of the brake linings. Contact aqualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately.Do not add brake fluid. This does notcorrect the error.

Only check the brake fluid level when thevehicle is stationary and on a level surface.

If the brake fluid level is between MINmark; and MAX mark: on the brake fluidreservoir, it is correct.

Care

General notes

G WARNINGMany cleaning products can be hazardous.Some are poisonous, others are flammable.Always follow the instructions on theparticular container. Always open yourvehicle's doors or windows when cleaning theinside.Never use fluids or solvents that are notdesigned for cleaning your vehicle.Always lock away cleaning products and keepthem out of reach of children.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsiblemanner.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs and

Care 291

Maintenance

andcare

Z

the brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. This could cause an accident. Forthis reason, you must drive particularlycarefully after washing the vehicle until thebrakes have dried.

G WARNINGThe vehicle is brakedwhen the HOLD functionor DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,deactivate theHOLD function andDISTRONICPLUS before the vehicle is washed in anautomatic car wash.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatictransmission is in positionNwhen washingyour vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Thevehicle could be damaged if thetransmission is in another position.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the sliding sunroofare fully closed.Rthe ventilation/heating is switched off(the OFF button has been pressed).Rthe windshield wiper switch is in position0.

Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on thewindshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in allcountries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGDo not use power washers with circular-jetnozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, inparticular the tires. You could otherwisedamage the tires and cause an accident.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information about

292 CareMaintenance

andcare

the correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the wheels! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintworkScratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused byinadequate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.

! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care productsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately everythree to five months, depending on theclimate conditions and the care product used.If the dirt has penetrated the paint surface orif the paintwork has become dull, then thepaintwork should be cleaned. Use thecleaning product Paint Cleaner, which hasbeen approved by Mercedes-Benz.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish careIf your vehicle has a clear matte finish,observe the following instructions in order toavoid damage to the paintwork due toincorrect care.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

Care 293

Maintenance

andcare

Z

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitablematerials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerablesurface damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGBefore cleaning the windshield or wiperblades, switch off the windshield wipers andremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button repeatedly until allindicator lamps in the instrument cluster havegone out. The windshield wipers couldotherwise move and injure you.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not touch the insides of the windowswith hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or

ring. There is otherwise a risk of damagingthe windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certaincircumstances prevent water from drainingaway. This can lead to corrosion damageand damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of thewindows with a damp cloth and a cleaningagent that is recommended and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the wiper blades

G WARNINGBefore cleaning the windshield or wiperblades, switch off the windshield wipers andremove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button repeatedly until allindicator lamps in the instrument cluster havegone out. The windshield wipers couldotherwise move and injure you.

! Only fold thewindshieldwipers away fromthe windshield when vertical. Otherwise,you will damage the hood.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

294 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo. Or clean the exterior lightingwith cleaning cloths.

Cleaning the mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo. Cleaning cloths may be used aswell.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipmentmanufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the areaaround the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens:.

Cleaning the exhaust pipes! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaust

Care 295

Maintenance

andcare

Z

tail pipe by cleaning it regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.X Clean the exhaust tail pipes with a chromecare product tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of thefollowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available householdcleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead toirreparable damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using acommercially available microfiber clothand TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a drymicrofiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGWhen cleaning the steering wheel boss anddashboard, do not use cockpit sprays orcleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaningagents containing solvents cause the surfaceto become porous, and as a result, plasticparts may break away and be thrown aroundthe interior when an air bag is deployed, whichmay result in severe injuries.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar items

You can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trimelements! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners,polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a riskof damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

296 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the seat covers! Do not use microfiber cloths to cleangenuine leather, artificial leather orAlcantara® covers. If used often, these candamage the cover.

! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe thecovers down with a dry cloth. Make surethat the leather does not becomesoaked. It may otherwise become roughand cracked. Only use leather careagents that have been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. You canobtain these from a qualified specialistworkshop.Rclean artificial leather covers with a clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with amicrofiber clothmoistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seatsections to avoid leaving visible lines.Leave the seat to dry afterwards.Cleaning results depend on the type ofdirt and how long it has been there.Rclean Alcantara® covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash, they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts

by heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soapsolution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor a cleaning agent recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textilecleaning agents recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 297

Maintenance

andcare

Z

298

Useful information ............................ 300Where will I find...? ........................... 300Flat tire .............................................. 301Battery (vehicle) ................................ 306Jump-starting .................................... 310Towing and tow-starting .................. 311Fuses .................................................. 314

299

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Where will I find...?

First-aid kitDepending on the vehicle's equipment, thefirst-aid kit is located either in an openstowage space or behind the cover on the leftside.X Open the trunk lid.

Example: first-aid kit behind the side trim panelX To open the cover: turn rotary knob: inthe direction of the arrow and fold downcover;.

X Remove the first-aid kit.

Example: first-aid kit in an open stowage spaceX Remove first-aid kit:.

i Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace thecontents if necessary, and replace missingitems.

Vehicle tool kitThe vehicle tool kit can be found in thestowage well under the trunk floor.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 264).

: Vehicle tool kit tray; Stowage well= Spare wheel/"Minispare" emergency

spare wheelThe vehicle tool kit contains:RFolding wheel chockRFuse allocation chartRJackROne pair of gloves

300 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

RLug wrenchRTowing eye

"Minispare" emergency spare wheelThe "Minispare" emergency spare wheel canbe found in the stowage well under the trunkfloor.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 264).

X Remove tool kit tray:.X Turn stowage tray; counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Remove "Minispare" emergency sparewheel=.

For further information on changing a wheeland mounting the spare wheel, see(Y page 301).

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with a"Minispare" emergency spare wheel orMOExtended tires (tires with run-flatcharacteristics) (Y page 301).

i Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tires.

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics have status 0,which is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 142).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed.Anyone who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention totraffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.The maximum driving distance isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden and approximately18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fullyladen.

Flat tire 301

Breakdow

nassistance

In addition to the vehicle load, the drivingdistance possible depends upon:RSpeedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme drivingconditions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flatmode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. whencornering, accelerating quickly and whenbraking. There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

i When changing or replacing one or all ofthe tires, note the label "MOExtended".Take note also of the size specified for thevehicle.

Changing a wheel and mounting thespare wheel

Preparing the vehicleWhen using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire typeof the spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever install more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

i Vehicles without a spare wheel oremergency spare wheel are not equippedwith a tire-change tool kit at the factory. Formore information on which tools arerequired to perform awheel change on yourvehicle, e.g. wheel chock, lug wrench oralignment bolt, consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

X Prepare the vehicle as described(Y page 301).

X Remove the following items (depending onthe vehicle's equipment) from the stowagewell under the trunk/cargo compartmentfloor:Remergency spare wheelRfolding wheel chock

302 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Rlug wrenchRjack

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling awayIf your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the vehicle tool kit(Y page 300).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsecuring measure to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, for example when changing awheel.

X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear of

the wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On downhill gradients: place chocks orother suitable items in front of the wheelsof the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriatejacking point of the vehicle. The base of thejack must be positioned vertically, directlyunder the jacking point of the vehicle.

The following must be observed when raisingthe vehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If usedincorrectly, the jack could tip over with thevehicle raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brake

Flat tire 303

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

and inserting wheel chocks. Neverdisengage the parking brake while thevehicle is raised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 inches (3 cm).Rnever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle israised.Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the boltscompletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thewheel housings of the front wheels and justin front of the wheel housings of the rearwheels (arrows).

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

X Position jack= at jacking point;.

X Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn crank? clockwise until jack= sitscompletely on jacking point; and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn crank? until the tire is raised amaximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.

304 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Removing a wheelX Unscrew the wheel bolts.

! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the eventof damage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 342).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safetyreasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou only use wheel bolts which have beenapproved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.Be sure to use the original-length wheel boltswhen refitting the original wheel after it hasbeen repaired.X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Place the emergency spare wheel on thewheel hub and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they arefinger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGTire pressure that is too high or too low canlead to a blowout of the mounted emergencyspare wheel/spare wheel, particularly whendriving with a heavy load and increasingspeed. There is a risk of accident.Check the tire pressure of the emergencyspare wheel or spare wheel and adjust it.When doing so, observe the specified tirepressure.

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once againstanding firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.

Flat tire 305

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in acrosswise pattern in the sequenceindicated (: toA). The tightening torquemust be 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position andstore it together with the rest of the tire-change tool kit in the trunk/cargocompartment.

X Transport the defective wheel in the trunk/cargo compartment.

orX Depending on the size of the wheel, youmay also be able to secure the defectivewheel in the spare wheel well. In this case,you will have to remove the stowage wellcasing from the spare wheel well and stowit securely in the trunk/cargocompartment.

i USA only: when you are driving with theemergency spare wheel mounted, the tirepressure monitoring system cannotfunction reliably. Only restart the tirepressure monitoring system when thedefective wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.

All wheels mounted must be equipped withfunctioning sensors. The defective wheelshould no longer be in the vehicle.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan, for example, lead to a short circuit anddamage your vehicle's electronic system. Thiscan disrupt driving safety systems such asABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®(Electronic Stability Program).RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lockduring braking. This limits the steerabilityof the vehicle when braking and the brakingdistance may increase. There is a risk ofaccident.RIf ESP®malfunctions, the vehicle will not bestabilised if it starts to skid or awheel startsto spin. There is a risk of accident.

You should therefore have all work involvingthe battery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGComply with safety precautions and takeprotectivemeasureswhen handling batteries.

Risk of explosion

Fire, open flames andsmoking are prohibitedwhen handling the battery.Avoid creating sparks.

306 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

Battery acid is caustic.Avoid contact with the skin,eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protectiveclothing, in particulargloves, an apron and a facemask.Immediately rinse acidsplashes off with cleanwater. Consult a doctor ifnecessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator'sManual.

G WARNINGFailure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injury or death.Never lean over batteries while connecting.You might get injured.Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do notallow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,skin or clothing. In case it does, immediatelyflush affected area with water and seekmedical help if necessary.A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,which is flammable and explosive. Keepflames or sparks away from battery, avoidimproper connection of jumper cables,smoking etc.

G WARNINGDo not place any metal objects on the batteryas this could result in a short circuit.Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the riskof acid burns in the event of an accident.Take care that you do not become staticallycharged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or

rubbing against textiles. For this reason, youalso should not pull or push the battery overcarpets or other synthetic materials.Never touch the battery first. First, touch theoutside body of the vehicle in order to releaseany possible electrostatic charges.Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. Thebattery could explode if touched due toelectrostatic charge or due to sparkformation.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or aspecial collection point forused batteries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove theSmartKey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure that the ignition is switchedoff. Check that all the indicator lamps inthe instrument cluster are off. Otherwise,electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminal

Battery (vehicle) 307

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.Rthe transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. Thevehicle is secured against rolling away.You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

In order for the battery to achieve themaximum possible service life, it must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.Have the battery charge level checked morefrequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle fora lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked up for a long period of time.Like other batteries, the vehicle battery maydischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the batterydisconnected at a qualified specialistworkshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshopfor further information.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock; see the separate operatinginstructions.On vehicles with COMAND and anavigation system, the clock is setautomatically.Rreset the function for automaticallyfolding the exterior mirrors in/out by

folding the mirrors out once(Y page 104).10

Charging the battery

G WARNINGNever charge a battery still installed in thevehicle unless a battery charger unit approvedby Mercedes-Benz is being used. Gases mayescape during charging and cause explosionsthat may result in paint damage, corrosion orpersonal injury.A battery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved byMercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. It permits the charging of thebattery in its installed position. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center for furtherinformation and availability.Charge the battery in accordance with theseparate instructions for the battery charger.

G WARNINGThere is a risk of acid burns during thecharging process due to the gases whichescape from the battery. Do not lean over thebattery during the charging process.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. Avoid contact with theskin, eyes or clothing.

! Only charge the installed battery with abattery charger which has been tested andapproved byMercedes-Benz. These batterychargers allow the battery to be chargedwhile still installed in the vehicle.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 310).

10 This function is only available in vehicles for Canada.

308 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

X Open the hood (Y page 287).X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donorbattery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 310).

X Read the battery charger's operatinginstructions before charging the battery.

Battery (vehicle) 309

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

G WARNINGFailure to follow these directions will cause damage to the electronic components, and can leadto a battery explosion and severe injury or death.Never lean over batteries while connecting or jump starting. You might get injured.Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, skin orclothing. In case it does, immediately flush affected area with water, and seek medical help ifnecessary.A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, which is flammable and explosive. Keep flames orsparks away from battery, avoid improper connection of jumper cables, smoking, etc.Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can result in it exploding, causing personal injury.Read all instructions before proceeding.

G WARNINGNon-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoidrepeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Vehicles with a gasoline engine: avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts.Otherwise, the catalytic converter could be damaged by non-combusted fuel.

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaustsystem are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.Rjump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rbare parts of the terminal clamp do not come into contact with other metal parts while thejumper cables are connected to the battery.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.These parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).X Open the hood (Y page 287).

310 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, beginning with your own battery.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor batteryB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then frompositive terminal; and positive terminal=, each time beginning at the contacts on yourown vehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you tow the vehicle, you must use a rigidtowing bar if:

Rthe engine is not running.Rthere is a brake system malfunction.Rthere is a malfunction in the power supplyor the vehicle's electrical system.

The power assistance for the steering and thebrake force booster do not work when theengine is not running. You will need more

Towing and tow-starting 311

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

force to steer and brake, you may have todepress the brake pedal with maximum force.Before towing away, make sure that thesteering can be moved and is not locked.If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight of yourvehicle.

G WARNINGThe vehicle is brakedwhen the HOLD functionor DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if thevehicle is to be towed.

It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,as this could damage the vehicle. If indoubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stopbutton. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock and shift the automatictransmission toN. Then, turn the SmartKeyback to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.

The automatic transmission must be inposition N when the vehicle is being towed.

The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot shift the automatic transmission toposition N

Release the selector lever lock manually tomove it out of position P (Y page 155).

i Deactivate the automatic locking feature(Y page 82). You could otherwise be lockedout when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eyeX Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit (Y page 300).

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe may be hot. You couldburn yourself if you touch the tail pipe. Beparticularly careful when removing the rearcover.

Themountings for the removable towing eyesare located in the bumpers. They are at thefront and at the rear, under the covers.

X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

312 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

X Take cover: off the opening.X Screw the towing eye in clockwise to thestop and tighten it.

Removing the towing eyeX Loosen the towing eye and unscrew it.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit.

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraisedOnly possible on vehicles without4MATIC.When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 311).

! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® couldotherwise damage the brake system.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 113).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X When leaving the vehicle, take theSmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO keywith you.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe groundIt is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 311).

G WARNINGThe power assistance for the steering and thebrake force booster do not work when theengine is not running. You will then needmuch more effort to brake and steer the

vehicle. Adapt your style of drivingaccordingly.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 113).i When towing with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual to signal a change ofdirection. In this case, only the turn signalsfor the desired direction flash. When youreset the combination switch, the hazardwarning lamps start flashing again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake.

Transporting the vehicleThe towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Move the selector lever to N.As soon as the vehicle is loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the parking brake.

X Move the selector lever to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheelsor wheel rims, not by parts of the vehiclesuch as axle or steering components.Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

Towing and tow-starting 313

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Notes for 4MATIC vehicles! Vehicles with 4MATIC must not be towedwith either the front or the rear axle raised,as doing so will damage the transmission.

If the vehicle has transmission damage ordamage to the front or rear axle, have ittransported on a transporter or trailer.In the event of damage to the electricalsystemIf the battery is defective, the automatictransmission will be locked in position P. Toshift the automatic transmission to positionN, you must provide power to the vehicle'selectrical system in the same way as whenjump-starting (Y page 310).Have the vehicle transported on a transporteror trailer.

Tow-starting (emergency starting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould otherwise damage the transmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting"at (Y page 310).

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOnly use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and that have thecorrect fuse rating for the systemsconcerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridgefaulty fuses. Using fuses that have not beenapproved or attempting to repair or bridgefaulty fuses could cause the fuse to beoverloaded and result in a fire. Have the causetraced and rectified at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the system

concerned. Otherwise, components orsystems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all thecomponents on the circuit and their functionsstop operating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 158).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it (Y page 141).

orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make surethe ignition is switched off (Y page 142).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box on the driver's side of thedashboardRFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the trunk on the right-hand sideof the vehicle, when viewed in the directionof travel

The fuse allocation chart is located in thevehicle tool kit in the stowage compartmentunder the trunk floor (Y page 300).

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as ascrewdriver to open the cover in the

314 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

dashboard. You could damage thedashboard or the cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X To open: pull out cover: slightly at thebottom in the direction of arrow=.

X Pull cover: outwards in the direction ofarrow; and remove it.

X To close: clip in cover: on the front ofthe dashboard.

X Fold cover: inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGMake sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off and that the SmartKey isremoved from the ignition lock before youopen the cover of the fuse box. Otherwise, thewindshield wipers and the wiper rods abovethe cover could be set in motion. This couldlead to you or others being injured by thewiper rods.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture

seeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Open the hood.

X Remove any existing moisture from thefuse box using a dry cloth.

X To open: take lines; from the guides.X Open clamps:.X Remove the fuse box cover forwards.X To close: check whether the rubber seal islying correctly in the cover.

X Insert the cover at the rear of the fuse boxinto the retainer.

X Fold down cover and close clamps:.X Secure lines; in the guides.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunk! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the trunk lid.

Fuses 315

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X To open: turn rotary catch: clockwise.X Open cover; downwards in the directionof the arrow.

316 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

Useful information ............................ 318Important safety notes .................... 318Operation ........................................... 318Winter operation ............................... 320Tire pressure ..................................... 322Loading the vehicle .......................... 329Maximum load rating ....................... 333Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .......................................... 334Tire labeling ....................................... 335Definition of terms for tires andloading ............................................... 339Changing a wheel ............................. 342Wheel and tire combinations ........... 343

317

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of accident.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart (designation, manufacturer, model).

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving,steering and braking characteristics of thevehicle. There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information andwarning notices onMOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.

Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialistworkshop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be foundin the "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 343).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure" sectionPay special attention to the country-specificrequirements for tire approval. Theserequirements can stipulate a specific tire typefor your vehicle. Furthermore, the use ofcertain tire types in certain regions and areasof operation can be highly beneficial. You canfind further information regarding tires atspecialist tire retailers, at qualified specialistworkshops or at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i Further information on wheels and tirescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

Operation

Notes on drivingRIf the vehicle is heavily laden, check the tirepressures and correct them if necessary.RWhen parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curbor other obstacles. If it is necessary to driveover curbs, speed humps or similarelevations, try to do so slowly and at anobtuse angle. Otherwise, the tires,particularly the sidewalls, can getdamaged.

318 OperationWheelsandtires

Notes on regularly inspecting wheelsand tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle. There is a risk ofaccident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

RRegularly check the wheels and tires ofyour vehicle for damage (e.g. cuts,punctures, tears, bulges on tires anddeformation or cracks or severe corrosionon wheels) at least once a month, as wellas after driving off-road or on rough roads.Damaged wheels can cause a loss of tirepressure.RRegularly check the tire tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the wholewidth of the tire (Y page 319). If necessary,turn the front wheels to full lock in order toinspect the inner side of the tire surface.RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other thanthe standard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle. Do not use any other valve caps orsystems, e.g. tire pressure monitoringsystems.RRegularly check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the emergency sparewheel or thespare wheel, particularly prior to long trips,and correct the pressure as necessary(Y page 322).

Tire tread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular where

speed is not adapted to suit the drivingconditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear atdifferent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depthis approximatelyá in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.

Notes on selecting, mounting andreplacing tiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RAfter mounting new tires, run them in atmoderate speeds for the first 60 miles

Operation 319

Wheelsandtires

Z

(100 km), as they only reach their fullperformance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at thelatest, regardless of wear. This also appliesto the spare wheel/emergency sparewheel.

The service life of tires depends on thefollowing factors amongst other things:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties) allow you to continue driving yourvehicle even if one or more tires are entirelydeflated.MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on drivingwithMOExtended tires in theevent of a flat tire can be found in the"Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 301).

Winter operation

Points to noteHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 342).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction and

braking power. Change the tires on yourvehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires atvery cold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tirespermanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. Thereis a risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanãin (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire typeof the spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever install more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), usewinter tires or all-season tires. Both types oftire are identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S markingprovide the best possible grip in wintry roadconditions. Only these tires will allow driving

320 Winter operationWheelsandtires

safety systems such as ABS and ESP® tofunction optimally in winter. These tires havebeen developed specifically for driving insnow.UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handlingcharacteristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 325).X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tirepressure loss warning system(Y page 325).

X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressuremonitor (Y page 326).

After installing a spare wheel or anemergency spare wheel, do not drive fasterthan 50 mph (80 km/h).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wishto mount snow chains on steel wheels,make sure that you remove the respective

wheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps mayotherwise be damaged.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use snow chainsthat have been specially approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding standard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 343).ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon aspossible when you come to a road that isnot snow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriateregulations if you wish to mount snowchains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).RSnow chains may not be mounted on theemergency spare wheel.

i You may wish to deactivateESP®(Y page 64) when pulling away withsnow chains installed. This way you canallow the wheels to spin in a controlledmanner, achieving an increased drivingforce (cutting action).

Winter operation 321

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

G WARNINGTires with tire pressures that are too low ortoo high are associated with the followinghazards:Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle isheavily laden or when driven at highspeeds.Rthe tires can wear excessively and/orunevenly, which can severely impair tiretraction.Rthe driving, steering and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.

There is a risk of accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

The recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.1.) Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side of thevehicle (Y page 329).The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.

i The specifications given on the followingTire and Loading Information placard areexamples. Tire pressure specifications arevehicle-specific and may deviate from thedata shown here. The tire pressuresapplicable to your vehicle can be found onthe Tire and Loading Information placard onyour vehicle.

: Recommended tire pressures

Option 2) Tire pressure table on the insideof the fuel filler flap.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

i Specifications shown in the examples oftire pressure tables are for illustrationpurposes only. Tire pressure specificationsare vehicle-specific and may deviate fromthe data shown here. Tire pressurespecifications applicable to your vehicleare located in your vehicle's tire pressuretable.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

322 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 336).

If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be resetto the higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds.

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

Option 3) The tire pressure for theemergency/collapsible spare wheel(depending on vehicle equipment) can befound:Rprinted in yellow on the rim of theemergency/collapsible spare wheelRin the "Wheel and tire combinations"section (Y page 343) in this Operator'sManualRon the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's side.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tirepressure monitors keep the tire valve open.This can also result in tire pressure loss. Thereis a risk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

To test tire pressure, use a suitable tirepressure gauge. The outer appearance of atire does not permit any reliable conclusion

Tire pressure 323

Wheelsandtires

Z

about the tire pressure. On vehicles equippedwith the electronic tire pressure monitoringsystem, the tire pressure can be checkedusing the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This isdependent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tirepressures when the tires are cold.The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account whenchecking the pressure of warm tires and onlycorrect the tire pressure if it is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire pressure when the tires are warm, theresulting value will be higher than if the tireswere cold. This is normal. Do not reduce thetire pressure to the value specified for coldtires. The tire pressure would otherwise betoo low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flapRprinted in yellow on the rim of theemergency/collapsible spare wheel(depending on vehicle equipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low canoverheat and burst as a consequence. Inaddition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impairthe braking properties and the drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Rwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumptionRoverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristics

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRbe more susceptible to damageRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRincrease the braking distance

Maximum tire pressuresNever exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe the

324 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

recommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 322).

: Example: maximum permissible tirepressure

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the "tire pressure information"section (Y page 322).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRin the "Tire pressure information" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tirepressure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard on theB-pillar on the driver's side of your vehicle.

X If necessary, increase the tire pressure tothe recommended value (Y page 322).

X If the tire pressure is too high, release airby pressing down the metal pin in the valveusing the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

Important safety notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tirepressure loss warning system monitors theset tire pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result ofa loss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.The tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 322).The tire pressure loss warning system doesnot replace the need to regularly check yourvehicle's tire pressures, since an even loss ofpressure on several tires at the same timecannot be detected by the tire pressure losswarning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted to your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.

Tire pressure 325

Wheelsandtires

Z

Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style(cornering at high speeds or driving withhigh rates of acceleration).Ryou are driving with a heavy load (in thevehicle or on the roof).

Restarting the tire pressure losswarning systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, consult the Tire andLoading Information placard on theB-pillar on the driver's side or the tirepressure table on the inside of the fuel fillerflap to ensure the tire pressure in all fourtires is set correctly for the currentoperating conditions.The tire pressure loss warning system canonly give reliable warnings if you have setthe correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tirepressure is set, these incorrect values willbe monitored.

X Observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 322).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is inposition 2 (Y page 141) in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button to select theServiceService menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYesYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, use the9 or: button toselect CancelCancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

Important safety notesIt is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 322). Note that the correct tirepressure for the current operating situationmust first be taught-in to the tire pressuremonitor. If there is a substantial loss ofpressure, the warning threshold for thewarning message is aligned to the referencevalues taught-in. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure of thecold tires (Y page 329). The currentpressures are saved as new reference values.As a result, a warning message will appear ifthe tire pressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe

326 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

the notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 322).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.If a tire pressure monitor system is installed,the vehicle's wheels have sensors installedthatmonitor the tire pressures in all four tires.The tire pressure monitor warns you if thepressure drops in one ormore of the tires. Thetire pressure monitor only functions if thecorresponding sensors are installed to allwheels.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA)or pressure loss (Canada). Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor is not malfunctioning.RUSA only: if the warning lamp flashes foraround a minute and then remains litconstantly, the tire pressure monitor ismalfunctioning.

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tirepressure label on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. If your vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure label,you should determine the proper tire pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoring

system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will be repeated every time thevehicle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

i USA only:If the tire pressure monitor ismalfunctioning, it may take more than ten

Tire pressure 327

Wheelsandtires

Z

minutes for the tire pressure warning lampto inform you of themalfunction by flashingfor approximately one minute and thenremaining lit.When the malfunction has been rectified,the tire pressure warning lamp goes outafter a few minutes of driving.

Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the multifunction display.

i The tire pressure values indicated by theon-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station with a pressuregauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to thosemeasured atsea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce thetire pressures.

i The operation of the tire pressuremonitorcan be affected by interference from radiotransmitting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones, two-way radios) that may bebeing operated in or near the vehicle.

i USA only:This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and

2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Checking tire pressure electronicallyX Make sure that the SmartKey is inposition 2 (Y page 141) in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServiceSettingsSettings menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press buttona.The current tire pressure for eachwheelwillbe displayed in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the TireTire pressurespressures willwill bebedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in period, the tire pressuremonitor automatically recognizes newwheelsor new sensors. As long as a clear allocationof the tire pressure values to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

i If a spare wheel/emergency spare wheelis mounted, the system may continue toshow the tire pressure of thewheel that hasbeen removed for a few minutes. If thisoccurs, note that the value displayed forthe position where the spare tire ismounted is not the same as the sparewheel/emergency spare wheel's currenttire pressure.

Tire pressure monitor warningmessagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects asignificant pressure loss on one ormore tires,

328 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

a warning message is shown in themultifunction display. A warning tone alsosounds and the tire pressure warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster.Each tire that is affected by a significant lossof pressure is highlighted with a color.If the following message appears in themultifunction display: Correct TireCorrect TirePressure:Pressure:X Check the tire pressure on all four wheelsand correct it if necessary.

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle areinterchanged, the tire pressures may bedisplayed for the wrong positions for ashort time. This is rectified after a fewminutes of driving, and the tire pressuresare displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor,all existingwarningmessages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as thereference values for monitoring. In mostcases, the tire pressure monitoring systemrecognizes the new reference valuesautomatically.However, you can also define referencevalues manually as described here:X Set the tire pressure to the valuerecommended for the correspondingdriving situation on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillar on thedriver's side (Y page 322).Additional tire pressure values for drivingat high speeds or with heavy loads can befound in the tire pressure table on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServiceSettingsSettings menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows thecurrent tire pressure for the individual tiresor the Tire pressures will beTire pressures will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Press. Monitor RestartedTire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Loading the vehicle 329

Wheelsandtires

Z

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximumpermissible vehicle load. It also containsdetails of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on thefront and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible loadi The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The maximumpermissible load is vehicle-specific andmay deviate from the data shown here. The

maximum permissible load that applies foryour vehicle can be found on your vehicle'sTire and Loading Information placard.

X Specification for maximum permissibleload: is listed on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

Number of seatsi The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The number ofseats is vehicle-specific and can differ fromthe details shown. The number of seats inyour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed to

330 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

travel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "Thecombined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Refer tothis Operator's Manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo andluggage load capacity of your vehicle(Y page 333).

Loading the vehicle 331

Wheelsandtires

Z

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea load limit of 1 500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you areusing the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard (Y page 330).

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined maximumweight of occupantsand cargo (data fromthe Tire and LoadingInformation placard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 2 Number of people inthe vehicle (driverand occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of theoccupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of theoccupants

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)Occupant 2:180 lbs (82 kg)Occupant 3:160 lbs (73 kg)Occupant 4:140 lbs (63 kg)Occupant 5:120 lbs (54 kg)

Occupant 1:200 lbs (91 kg)Occupant 2:190 lbs (86 kg)Occupant 3:150 lbs (68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of alloccupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

332 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 3 Permissible load andtrailer load/noseweight(maximumpermissible loadrating from the Tireand LoadingInformation placardminus the grossweight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -750 lbs (340 kg)= 750 lbs(340 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -540 lbs (245 kg)= 960 lbs(435 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg) -150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs(612 kg)

The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.Further information can be found under "Towing a trailer" (Y page 333).

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total loadcarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 329).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants, cargo, and fulltrailer load if applicable) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,

the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usuallyapproximately 10% of the gross weight of thetrailer and its load.Your Mercedes-Benz has been designedprimarily to carry passengers and theirluggage. Mercedes-Benz does notrecommend towing a trailer with your vehicle.

Maximum load rating

Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 329).

Maximum load rating 333

Wheelsandtires

Z

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Maximum tire load: is the maximumpermissible weight for which the tire isapproved.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Theirpurpose is to provide drivers with uniformreliable information on tire performance data.tire manufacturers have to grade tires usingthree performance factors: tread wear:,tire traction; and heat resistance=. Alltires sold in North America are provided withthe corresponding quality class mark on thesidewall of the tire, even though theseregulations do not apply to Canada.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Where applicable, the tire gradinginformation can be found on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and maximumtire width.For example:

Treadwear Traction Temperature

200 AA A

All passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions on

334 Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsWheelsandtires

specified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry roadsurfaces.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundthe freezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) for all four wintertires (Y page 320) to maintain normal drivingcharacteristics in winter. Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.Stopping distance, however, is stillconsiderably greater than when the road isnot covered with ice or snow. Takeappropriate care when driving.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. These represent the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause thematerial of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Tire labeling

Tire labeling overviewThe following markings are on the tire inaddition to the tire name (sales designation)and the manufacturer's name:

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 339)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 338)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 333)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 324)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 339)C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed index (Y page 336)D Load index (Y page 338)E Tire name

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire labeling 335

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the sizedescription (as shown above): these arepassenger vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is thesize ratio between the tire height and tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspect

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 329).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 333).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 338).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearingcapacity and the approved maximum speedcould lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.There is a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully and

336 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

adapt your driving style to the trafficconditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"in the size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no servicespecifications, ask the tire manufacturer inorder to find out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In thisexample, "97 Y" is the service specification.The letter "Y" represents the speed rating.The maximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires withmaximum speeds of over 186 mph

(300 km/h) must include "ZR", and theservice specification must be given inparentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"indicates that the maximum speed of thetire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask thetire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S11 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S11 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S11 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S11 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires.In addition to theM+Smarking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC)regarding snow traction, andwere speciallydeveloped for driving on snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding the following speeds:Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles):130 mph (210 km/h)RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)RAMG vehicles with increased top speed:174 mph (280 km/h)

The speed rating of tires mounted at thefactory may be higher than the maximumspeed that the electronic speed limiterpermits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating for your vehicle as specified inthe "tires" section (Y page 343), e.g. if youbuy new tires.

11 Or M+Si for winter tires.

Tire labeling 337

Wheelsandtires

Z

Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

In addition to the load-bearing index, loadindex: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed ratingB(Y page 336) onthe sidewall of the tire.RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that everymanufacturer of new tires or retreader has toimprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables tire manufacturers to informpurchasers of recalls and other safety-relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufactureridentification code;, tire size=, tire typecode? and manufacturing dateA.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code:manufacturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 318).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can be usedby the manufacturer as a code to describespecific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

338 Tire labelingWheelsandtires

Tire characteristics

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers insidewall: and under tire tread;.

Definition of terms for tires andloading

Tire ply composition and materialusedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure.14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department ofTransportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which thevehicle is designed multiplied by68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for thevehicle, regardless of whether it is actuallyinstalled on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 339

Wheelsandtires

Z

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants,luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable. The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWRas specified on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories,occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of the curbweight of the vehicle, the weight of theaccessories, the total load limit and theweight of the optional equipment installed atthe factory.

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPacorresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tirepressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are theequivalent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. This specifies the load-bearingcapacity more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipmentif these are installed in the vehicle, but doesnot include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum load rating in kilograms orpounds is the maximum weight for which atire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

340 Definition of terms for tires and loadingWheelsandtires

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure of cold tiresThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven furtherthan 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These

optional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of theaccessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg(150 lbs) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Definition of terms for tires and loading 341

Wheelsandtires

Z

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 301) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. It also providesinstructions on changing a wheel or mountingthe spare wheel/emergency spare wheel.

Interchanging the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk ofaccident.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notices in the section on "Changing awheel and mounting the spare wheel"(Y page 302).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should beinterchanged every 3,000 to 6,000 miles(5,000 to 10,000 km), or earlier if tire wearrequires. Do not change the direction ofwheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis interchanged. Check the tire pressures.Information on changing tires and mountingthe spare wheel (Y page 302).

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components arelocated in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage theelectronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.You may mount a spare wheel/emergencyspare wheel against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limit specified on the spare wheel/emergency spare wheel.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

342 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for yourvehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (onlycertain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,vehicle noise emissions or fuelconsumption, may otherwise be adverselyaffected. In addition, when driving with aload, tire dimension variations could causethe tires to come into contact with thebodywork and axle components. This couldresult in damage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested norrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always bedetected on retreaded tires. As a result,Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehiclesafety if retreaded tires are mounted. Donot mount used tires if you have noinformation about their previous usage.

i The recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Informationplacard with the recommended tirepressures on the B-pillar on the driver'ssideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operatingconditions (Y page 322).Check tire pressures regularly, and onlywhen the tires are cold. Comply with themaintenance recommendations of the tiremanufacturer in the vehicle documentwallet.

i Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle(left/right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)

i On the following pages, you can findinformation on approved wheel rims andtire sizes for equipping your vehicle withwinter tires. Winter tires are not availableat the factory as standard equipment oroptional extras.If you would like to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, you may also, incertain circumstances, require rims of theappropriate size. The sizes of the approvedwinter tires may deviate from that of thestandard tires. This is dependent on themodel and the equipment installed at thefactory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Wheel and tire combinations 343

Wheelsandtires

Z

i Overview of abbreviations used in thefollowing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axle

In the following table, the wheel/tirecombinations are assigned to the vehiclemodels through variants, e.g. V1, V2 etc.:

V1 C 25012

V2 C 30012, C 300 4MATIC12

V3 C 35012, C 350 4MATIC12

V4 C 63 AMG

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

12 BlueEFFICIENCY

344 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Tires

Summer tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 225/45 R17 91 WMOExtended13, 14

7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

# # # —

FA

RA

225/45 R17 91 WMOExtended13

245/40 R17 91 WMOExtended13, 15

7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm)

# # # —

FA

RA

225/40 R18 92 Y XL

255/35 R18 94 Y XL15

7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

# # # —

FA

RA

225/40 R18 92 Y XL

255/35 R18 94 Y XL15

8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

# # # —

FA

RA

225/40 ZR18 92 Y XL

255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL15

8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.97 in (50 mm)8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

# # # —

FA

RA

235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL

255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL15

8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

— — — #

FA

RA

235/35 ZR19 XL

255/30 ZR19 XL15

8.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)9.0 J x 19 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

— — — #

13MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in conjunction with an activated tire pressure losswarning system or tire pressure monitor.

14 Not in conjunction with sports suspension code 486, dynamic handling package code 483 and Sportspackage code 950/952.

15 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 345

Wheelsandtires

Z

All-weather tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 205/55 R16 91 H M+S16 7.0 J x 16 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

# — — —

BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+S14 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

# # — —

FA

RA

225/45 R17 91 H M+S

245/40 R17 91 H M+S15

7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 2.28 in (58 mm)

# # # —

Winter tires Alloy wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

BA 205/55 R16 91 HM+Si16

7.0 J x 16 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

# — — —

BA 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

# # # —

BA 225/45 R17 91 HM+SiMOExtended13

7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.85 in (47 mm)

# # # —

BA 225/40 R18 92 V XLM+Si

8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

— — — #

BA 235/40 R18 95 V XLM+Si15

8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)

— — — #

FA

RA

235/40 R18 95 V XLM+Si255/35 R18 94 V XLM+Si15

8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.77 in (45 mm)9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 2.13 in (54 mm)

— — — #

16 C 300 4MATIC: not in conjunction with Sports package code 950/952.14 Not in conjunction with sports suspension code 486, dynamic handling package code 483 and Sportspackage code 950/952.

15 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.13MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat characteristics) only in conjunction with an activated tire pressure losswarning system or tire pressure monitor.

346 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

"Minispare" emergency spare wheel15

Tires Wheels V1 V2 V3 V4

T 125/90 R16 98 M16

tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

3.5 B x 16 H2Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm)

# — — —

T 125/80 R17 99 M17

tire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

3.5 B x 17 H2Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm)

— # # —

T 125/70 R18 99 Mtire pressure: 420 kPa (4.2 bar/61 psi)

3.5 B x 18 H2Wheel offset: 0.79 in (20 mm)

— — — #

i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.

15 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.16 C 300 4MATIC: not in conjunction with Sports package code 950/952.17 C 300 4MATIC: only in conjunction with Sports package code 950/952.

Wheel and tire combinations 347

Wheelsandtires

Z

348

Useful information ............................ 350Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 350Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 350Warranty ............................................ 350Identification plates ......................... 351Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 352Vehicle data ...................................... 358

349

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 25).

Information regarding technical data

i The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consulta Mercedes-Benz Center for the data for allvehicle variants and trim levels.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

G WARNINGDriving safety may be impaired if non-approved parts, tires and wheels or safety-relevant accessories are used.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Thiscould cause you to lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts orparts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheelsand accessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units andsensors for these restraint systems,may beinstalled in the following areas of yourvehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraintsystems.Have aftermarket accessories installed ata qualified specialist workshop.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Each part has beenspecially developed, manufactured orselected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles andfine-tuned for them. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supplyof genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. Inaddition, strategically located parts deliverycenters provide quick and reliable partsservice.Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) (Y page 351) and the enginenumber (Y page 352) when ordering genuineMercedes-Benz parts.

Warranty

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet.

350 WarrantyTechnicaldata

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (LemonLaws)

Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties. These are availableat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If you lose the Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to arrange areplacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate withvehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the identification plateis example data. This data is different forevery vehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the dataapplicable to your vehicle on the vehicle'sidentification plate.

VIN

Identification plates 351

Technicaldata

Z

X Slide the right-hand front seat to itsrearmost position.

X Fold floor covering: upwards.You will see VIN;.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Rat the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 352)Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 351)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into thecrankcase)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Service products and fillingcapacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing and disposing of servicefluids. Otherwise, you could endangerpersons or the environment.Keep service fluids out of the reach ofchildren.

For health reasons, you should preventservice fluids from coming into direct contactwith your skin or clothing.If a service fluid is swallowed, contact aphysician immediately.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. You should therefore only useproducts that have been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the followinginscription on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendationsindicate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGGasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.It burns violently and can cause seriouspersonal injury.

352 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline.Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline, avoidinhaling fumes and any skin or clothingcontact.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to yourhealth.

Tank capacity

Model Totalcapacity

All models 17.4 US gal(66.0 l)

Model Of whichreserve

All models (exceptC 63 AMG)

Approx.2.1 US gal(8.0 l)

C 63 AMG Approx.3.7 US gal(14.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel result in damage to the fuelsystem and engine.

! You should only refuel with unleadedpremium-grade gasoline as this avoidsdamaging the catalytic converter.If engine running problems are apparent,have the cause checked immediately andrepaired. Excess unburned fuel canotherwise enter the catalytic converter,leading to overheating and possiblycausing a fire.

! To ensure the longevity and fullperformance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline may be used.If there is no premium-grade unleadedgasoline available and regular unleadedgasoline must be used, please observe thefollowing precautions:Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full withregular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.Ravoid sudden acceleration.Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.two passengers without luggage, do notallow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm.Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is beingoperated in mountainous terrain, do notdepress the accelerator pedal furtherthanÔ of the pedal travel.

Only refuel using premium-grade unleadedgasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/orunleaded gasolinewith additives can be used.The concentration of additives in the fuel,however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:REthanolRTAMERETBERIPARTBAFor MTBE, the concentration should notexceed 15%.The concentration of methanol in gasoline,including other additives, must not exceed3%.Usingmixtures ofmethanol and ethanol is notpermitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanoland 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.

Service products and filling capacities 353

Technicaldata

Z

All of these mix fuels must fulfill the fuelrequirements, e.g.:Rknock resistanceRboiling pointRvapor pressureYouwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or onthe Internet at http://www.mbusa.com(USA only).

Information on refueling (Y page 156).

Additives! Do not refuel with low-grade fuel and donot use fuel additives that are not testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Damage to or malfunctions of the fuelsystem may otherwise occur.

One of the main problems of poor fuel qualityis the forming of deposits that are createdduring the gasoline combustion process.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.If you use fuels without these additives overa longer period of time, carbon deposits maybuild up. These deposits form at the inletvalves and in the combustion chamber inparticular.This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:Rlonger engine warm-up phaseRuneven idleRengine noiseRmisfiringRloss of powerCarbon deposits may form if the availabilityof gasoline with relevant additives isinsufficient (in certain regions). In this case,Mercedes-Benz recommends additivesapproved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

For a list of approved products, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Complywith the instructions for use on the productlabel.Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. Thiscauses unnecessary costs and could damagethe engine.

Flexible fuel vehicles

Important safety notesG WARNINGE85 fuel (ethanol) and its vapours arepoisonous, highly flammable and highlycombustible. E85 fuel can cause seriousinjury if ignited, if you come into contact withit you or if you inhale fuel vapors. Avoidinhaling E85 fuel vapors and avoid skincontact with E85 fuel. Extinguish any nakedflames before refueling. Keep sparks awayfrom E85 fuel, and do not smoke.

Flexible Fuel vehicles can be refueledwith thefollowing fuel types:Rpremium-grade unleaded gasolineRE85 fuelRa mixture of E85 fuel and premium-gradeunleaded gasoline

i Flexible Fuel vehicles can be recognizedby the Ethanol up to E85 sticker on theinside of the fuel filler flap.

Fuel consumptionThe energy content of E85 fuel is less thanthat of the same amount of premium-gradegasoline. The amount of fuel consumed whenoperating the vehicle with E85 fuel istherefore higher than with premium-gradegasoline.

MaintenanceInform your authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter that you are operating or haveoperated the vehicle with E85 fuel.

354 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Low outside temperaturesIf the outside temperature is below 32 ‡(0 †) the starting procedure can takenoticeably longer when operating with E85fuel.E85 fuel is not suitable for use at outsidetemperatures under -4 ‡ (-20 †).

Engine oil

General notes! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary tofulfill the prescribed service intervals. Donot change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer replacementintervals than those prescribed. You couldotherwise cause engine damage or damageto the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the serviceinterval display regarding the oil change.Otherwise, youmay damage the engine andthe exhaust gas aftertreatment.

The engine oils are matched to theperformance of Mercedes-Benz engines andservice intervals. You should therefore onlyuse engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicles with maintenancesystems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

C 250BlueEFFICIENCY

271 229.3,229.5,229.51

C 300 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY

272 229.5

C 300BlueEFFICIENCY(Canada only)

276 229.3,229.5

C 350BlueEFFICIENCYC 350 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY(Canada only)

276

C 63 AMG 156 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

C 250 BlueEFFICIENCY 5.8 US qt (5.5 l)

C 300 BlueEFFICIENCY(Canada only)

6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

C 300 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY

7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

Service products and filling capacities 355

Technicaldata

Z

Model Capacity

C 350 BlueEFFICIENCYC 350 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY(Canada only)

C 63 AMG With external oilcooler:

9.0 US qt(8.5 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity)classification suitable for the prevailingoutside temperatures. The table shows youwhich SAE classifications are to be used. Thelow-temperature characteristics of engineoils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as aresult of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It istherefore strongly recommended that youcarry out regular oil changes using anapproved engine oil with the appropriate SAEclassification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGOver a period of time, the brake fluid absorbsmoisture from the air; this lowers its boilingpoint.If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,vapor pockets may form in the brake systemwhen the brakes are applied hard (e.g. whendriving downhill). This would impair brakingefficiency.You should have the brake fluid renewed atregular intervals. The brake fluid changeintervals can be found in the MaintenanceBooklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly ata qualified specialist workshop.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAntifreeze is highly flammable. Fire, openflames and smoking are prohibited whenhandling antifreeze.If antifreeze comes into contact with hotengine parts, it may ignite and you could burnyourself. Do not spill any antifreeze on hotengine parts.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at

356 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Orcontact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

The coolant is a mixture of water andantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performsthe following tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of thecoolant during operation is approximately266 ‡ (130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends anantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate inaccordance with MB Specifications forService Products 310.1.The coolant is checked with everymaintenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it isfilled with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosionprotection.

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

C 250BlueEFFICIENCY

Approx. 7.6 US qt(7.2 l)

C 300BlueEFFICIENCY(Canada only)C 300 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY

Approx. 8.9 US qt(8.4 l)

C 350BlueEFFICIENCYC 350 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY(Canada only)

C 63 AMG Approx. 12.4 US qt(11.7 l)

i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosioninhibitor/antifreeze.

Windshield/headlamp cleaningsystem

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWasher solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it mayignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

Service products and filling capacities 357

Technicaldata

Z

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 parts water.At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB WinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outsidetemperature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MBWinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

All models exceptC 300 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY

3.7 US qt (3.5 l)

C 300 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY

6.3 US qt (6.0 l)

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- Tires- Load- Condition of the suspension- Optional equipmentRthe vehicle length specified includes thefront license plate adapter.

Dimensions and weights

Model ::Opening height

All models exceptC 300BlueEFFICIENCY

69.2 in(1757 mm)

C 300BlueEFFICIENCY(Canada only)

69.3 in(1761 mm)

358 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

Missing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

All models (exceptAMG vehicles)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.1 in (2008 mm)

Wheelbase 108.7 in (2760mm)

Turning radius 35.6 ft (10.84 m)

C 250BlueEFFICIENCY

Vehicle length 181.0 in (4596mm)

Vehicle height 56.9 in (1444 mm)

Maximum roof load max. 220 lb(100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

max. 220 lb(100 kg)

C 300BlueEFFICIENCY(Canada only)

Vehicle length 181.0 in (4596mm)

Vehicle height 57.0 in (1448 mm)

Maximum roof load max. 220 lb(100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

max. 220 lb(100 kg)

C 300 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY

Vehicle length 182.3 in (4630mm)

Vehicle height 56.9 in (1444 mm)

Maximum roof load

Maximum trunkload

max. 220 lb(100 kg)

C 350BlueEFFICIENCYC 350 4MATICBlueEFFICIENCY(Canada only)

Vehicle length 182.3 in (4630mm)

Vehicle height 56.9 in (1444 mm)

Maximum roof load

Maximum trunkload

C 63 AMG

Vehicle length 185.5 in (4712mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.1 in (2008 mm)

Vehicle height 56.4 in (1433 mm)

Wheelbase 108.9 in (2765mm)

Turning radius 36.4 ft (11.10 m)

Maximum roof load max. 220 lb(100 kg)

Maximum trunkload

max. 220 lb(100 kg)

Vehicle data 359

Technicaldata

Z

360